JP6774515B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted by a player and the start lever is operated, the rotation of a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on their respective surfaces is started, and the stop button is operated. Then, the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a privilege is given according to the combination of the displayed symbols, that is, a so-called pachislot machine is known.

In such a game machine, when an operation to the start lever (hereinafter referred to as "start operation") is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is "internal winning". Along with the combination, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to start the rotation of a plurality of reels, and when the operation to the stop button (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation") is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor Is driven and controlled, and the rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, when the player shifts to an advantageous gaming state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to the player, the number of times the stop operation is performed in a predetermined push order at the time of winning a re-game combination regardless of the push order, and in the case of a specific push order. When the winning combination wins, the number of times the stop operation is performed in a predetermined push order different from the specific push order is counted, and when the counted value becomes a predetermined value (for example, 4), , A gaming machine that outputs a signal indicating that an advantageous gaming state is in progress from an external centralized terminal plate is known (Patent Document 1).

According to this gaming machine, every time the counted value reaches a predetermined value, a signal indicating that the advantageous gaming state is in progress is output from the external centralized terminal board, so that the advantageous gaming state is appropriately obtained. It becomes possible to transmit the number of transitions to to the outside.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-192724

By the way, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, the advantageous gaming state continues for the first time from the normal game (hereinafter referred to as "first hit") and during the advantageous gaming state. In some cases, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, these are output as common signals from the external centralized terminal plate.

Therefore, the player can determine the number of initial hits and the number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state depending on the number of transitions to the advantageous gaming state displayed on the external display or the like connected to the external centralized terminal board. There was a problem that it could not be done and there was a possibility of hesitating to start the game.

Further, from the viewpoint of security, since the main control circuit and the sub control circuit, and the main control circuit and the external display etc. are connected in only one direction, the main control circuit is advantageous to be managed by the sub control circuit. Since it is not possible to output a signal from the external centralized terminal board while observing the game status or in response to a request from an external display, for example, even if a communication error occurs, take action. There is also the fact that it cannot be done.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game and reducing a decrease in the operation of the game machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is an advantageous gaming state control that controls an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) that is advantageous to the player until the predetermined ending condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition. A gaming machine including means, notification means for executing notification of various information to a player, and notification control means for controlling notification executed by the notification means, wherein the advantageous gaming state control means, at least, the a predetermined start condition that the number of contact Keru game in different normal game state becomes game number of Jo Tokoro is advantageous gaming state, the notification control means, wherein in the normal gaming state One specific notification data is determined from a plurality of specific notification data according to the number of games until the predetermined number of games is reached, and notification according to the determined specific notification data is executed by the notification means, and the plurality of specific notification data are executed. The specific notification data includes at least the first specific notification data and the second specific notification data, and when the number of games until the predetermined number of games is reached is in the first range, and when the second specific notification data is in the first range. When it is within the range, the first specific notification data can be determined with a predetermined probability, and the second specific notification data can be determined with a specific probability until the number of games reaches the predetermined number . When the number of games is in the third range and in the fourth range, the second specific notification data can be determined with the predetermined probability, and the first specific with the specific probability. The broadcast data can be determined, and the number of games until the predetermined number of games is reached in the order of the third range, the first range, the fourth range, and the second range is small. To do.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the plurality of specific notification data further includes a third specific notification data and the number of games until the predetermined number of games is reached is in the first range. The third specific notification data can be determined with the predetermined probability, and when the number of games until the predetermined number of games is reached is in the second range, when it is in the third range, and when It is characterized in that the third specific notification data can be determined with the specific probability when it is in the fourth range.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and reduce the decrease in the operation of the game machine.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external structure of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the state of the front panel in the state where the movable part is in the initial position in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the state of the front panel in the state where the movable part is in the effect position in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the front panel in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It shows the internal structure of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention, and is the front view in the state which the front door is open. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the auxiliary control circuit in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a transition figure of the gaming state in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the bonus combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the replay combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on a small combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on a small combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for general game state stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RB game state stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination decision table for a bonus stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the stop operation order and the winning combination with respect to the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a push order small combination in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and (b) shows a configuration of a push order small combination in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the push order small combination when it is not applied. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area allocated to the in RAM. It is a figure which shows the carry-over combination storage area allocated to in RAM. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the operation stop button storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the effect game state storage area allocated to the main RAM. It is a figure which shows the reel action lottery table for the main CZ state stored in the main ROM. (A) is a pseudo-game count lottery table stored in the main ROM, (b) is a pseudo-internal winning combination lottery table stored in the main ROM, and (c) is a high-probability transition lottery table stored in the main ROM. d) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of highly secured obstacle games stored in the main ROM, and (e) is a diagram showing a pseudo-probability change state end lottery table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the reel action lottery table for a fixed combination stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the mode suggestion effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the estimation example of the remaining game number by the remaining game number suggestion effect in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the point addition lottery table in AT stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the AT number addition lottery table in the addition state stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows the point addition lottery table in the addition state stored in the sub ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel effect selection data stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the excitation output table for production stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect symbol position search data stored in the main ROM. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on processing which is executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a lottery process in a pseudo-probability change state executed in the lock lottery process shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a lottery process during a normal game executed in the lock lottery process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lock execution process at the start of a game which is executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo game process which is executed in the lock execution process at the start of a game shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the state management process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the state management process in AT which is executed in the state management process shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an external signal output management process executed in the state management process shown in FIG. 51. It is a flowchart which shows the lock execution process at the end of a game which is executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process by the control of the main CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a communication data transmission process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a reel effect control process executed in the reel control process shown in FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a reel effect adjustment output process executed in the reel effect control process shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a reel effect adjustment output process executed in the reel effect control process shown in FIG. 59. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an effect symbol position update process executed in the reel effect adjustment output process shown in FIGS. 60 and 61. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control task which is activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 63. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task which is activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 63. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task which is started in the mother task which was started by the power-on process shown in FIG. 63. 6 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG. 66. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process executed in the command analysis process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the start command executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the addition state executed in the process at the time of receiving a start command shown in FIG. 69. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the pseudo probability change state which is executed in the process at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a normal game which is executed in the process at the time of receiving a start command shown in FIG. 69. It is a flowchart which shows the AT rush processing which is executed in the normal game process shown in FIG. 72, and the lock command reception processing shown in FIG. 74. It is a flowchart which shows the lock command reception processing which is executed in the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42 according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 42 according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the stop operation continuation suggestion effect which concerns on other embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine, which is a specific example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

[Functional flow of pachislot machines]
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachislot machine (for example, the pachislot machine 1 described later) is predetermined when a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever (for example, the start lever 16 described later) is operated. One value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from a random number in a numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 51 described later) draws a lot based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means is determined from among a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game for the start lever by the start switch (for example, the start switch 16S described later) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). The winning combination is determined by the winning probability.

By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning line is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided.

In addition, the pachislot machine can control the progress of the game to be stopped. Such control is referred to as "freeze" or "lock". For convenience, the control that stops the progress of the game executed at the start of the game is called "lock at the start of the game", and the control that stops the progress of the game executed at the end of the game is called "lock at the end of the game". Call. That is, the "lock at the start of the game" means that the operation of the stop buttons (for example, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R described later) is not effective for a predetermined period after the start lever is operated. In a sense, it is a control to stop the progress of the game, and "lock at the end of the game" is an operation to the bet button or an operation to the start lever for a predetermined period after the stop button is operated. Is a control that stops the progress of the game in the sense that is not effective. Of course, the trigger of "freeze" or "lock" is not limited to the above, and for example, after the start lever 16 is operated and any of the stop buttons is operated, after that for a predetermined period of time. It is also possible to perform control in which the operation of is not effective.

In addition, the internal winning combination determining means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and decides whether to perform "freeze" or "lock" in place of the internal winning combination or together with the internal winning combination. May be good. At that time, whether to extract a plurality of random numbers, determine the internal winning combination based on one of the random values, and perform "freeze" or "lock" based on the other random value. It may be decided whether or not.

Subsequently, when the stop button is pressed by the player after the plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later) are rotated, the reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 62 described later) is pressed. , 61L, 61C, 61R), which will be described later, controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 1 symbol. The maximum number of sliding pieces is not limited to these, and can be set as appropriate.

When the internal winning combination that allows the display of the symbol combination related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means uses the above-mentioned specified time to activate the winning line (hereinafter, the winning line). The rotation of the reel is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that it is displayed as much as possible along the "effective line").

On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the maximum number of sliding pieces so that they will not be displayed along the effective line using the above specified time. Stop the rotation of.

Further, when the determined internal winning combination changes the combination of symbols displayed according to the predetermined stop operation order, the reel stop control means also changes the predetermined stop operation order. With reference to this, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning.

That is, when the change of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line.

When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. The above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine.

In the present embodiment, the first stop operation of the reels performed when all the reels are rotating is the first stop operation, the stop operation performed after the first stop operation is the second stop operation, and the second stop operation. 2. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is called the third stop operation.

Further, in the pachislot machine, various effects are performed by the effect executing means (notification means) in the series of flows described above. These effects include image display performed by a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later), light output performed by a lamp (for example, a lamp group 21 described later), and speakers (for example, speakers 20L and 20R described later). It is performed by the output of the sound performed by, or a combination of these.

When the start lever is operated by the player, in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above, other lottery processing, for example, a random number value for production (hereinafter, random value for production) is extracted. To.

When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means (for example, the sub CPU 81 described later) determines by lottery from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect execution means is linked to each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels is started, the rotation of each reel is stopped, or when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. And perform the production.

In this way, in the pachislot machine, the player has an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination. It will be provided to increase the interest of players.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 6.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 3 is a front panel of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention in a state where moving parts are in initial positions. FIG. 4 is a front view of the state of the front panel in a state where the movable parts are in the effect position in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the front panel of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 6 shows the internal structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view with the door open.

The pachislot machine 1 is a game machine that plays a game using coins, medals, game balls, tokens, and other game media such as cards that store information on the game value given or given to the player. However, in the following, it will be described as using a medal.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a which is a main body for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b which is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess for carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 3) showing a specific example of the display device, and a lumbar panel 12. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided side by side inside the cabinet 2a. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R will be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and performs an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R for displaying symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the present embodiment, the image is displayed and the effect is executed by using the entire display unit 11a including the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

The display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are made of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the arrangement areas of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side), and are located in front of the three reels (player side). It is provided in. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R through the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are continuously arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R is stopped. It is set to a size that can display three symbols. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R, upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. Then, in the present embodiment, the line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is used as a winning line for determining whether or not to win. Define.

The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is arranged so as to be superimposed on the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and covers the decorative frame 101 having a panel opening 101a that exposes the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the front surface of the decorative frame 101. It has a protective cover 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 5).

As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative frame 101 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a panel opening 101a. The decorative frame 101 has an upper frame portion 111, a lower frame portion 112, a left frame portion 113, and a right frame portion 114. The decorative frame 101 is formed so that a pattern is formed on the surface by mixing a mixture with resin and injection molding. In order to generate a pattern on the surface by such molding, for example, the position of the injection gate may be adjusted.

The upper frame portion 111 is provided with a plurality of upper engaging holes 111a that open forward. The openings of the plurality of upper engaging holes 111a are each formed in a horizontally long rectangle. An upper engaging piece 126, which will be described later, of the protective cover 102 is inserted into these plurality of upper engaging holes 111a.

Further, the left frame portion 113 is provided with a plurality of left engaging holes 113a opening forward, and the right frame portion 114 is provided with a plurality of right engaging holes 114a opening forward. The openings of the plurality of left engaging holes 113a and the right engaging hole 114a are each formed in a vertically long rectangle. The left engaging piece 127 and the right engaging piece 128 of the protective cover 102, which will be described later, are inserted into the plurality of left engaging holes 113a and the right engaging hole 114a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the protective cover 102 is made of a translucent synthetic resin, and has a front surface portion 121 facing forward, an upper surface portion 122 facing upward, and a lower surface portion 123 facing downward. It has a left side surface portion 124 and a right side surface portion 125 facing sideways.

At the lower part of the front surface portion 121, notches 121a and 121b for switches for exposing the effect switches 22L and 22R, which will be described later, are formed. These switch notches 121a and 121b are formed in an arc shape according to the outer shape of the effect switches 22L and 22R.

A plurality of upper engaging pieces 126 are provided on the end surface of the upper surface portion 122. The plurality of upper engaging pieces 126 are formed in a flat plate shape having planes substantially orthogonal to each other in the vertical direction, and have flexibility. Further, an engaging ridge 126a is provided on the upper surface (one plane) of the plurality of upper engaging pieces 126.

When the upper engaging piece 126 is inserted into the plurality of upper engaging holes 111a of the decorative frame 101, the engaging ridge 126a engages with the upper frame portion 111 of the decorative frame 101, and the protective cover 102 is disengaged from the decorative frame 101. Can be avoided.

The left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 of the protective cover 102 are continuous with the front surface portion 121 at an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction. As a result, the left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 have a projecting piece 124A and a projecting piece 125A that project forward from the front surface portion 121. The front-facing end faces of the left side surface portion 124 and the right side surface portion 125 are the end faces on the projecting piece 124A and the projecting piece 125A side, and are formed in an arc shape so that the central portion projects most forward.

Further, a plurality of right engaging pieces 128 are provided on the end surface of the right side surface portion 125 facing rearward. The left side surface portion 124 is provided with a plurality of left engagement pieces 127 (not shown), similarly to the right engagement piece 128 in the right side surface portion 125. The plurality of left engaging pieces 127 and the plurality of right engaging pieces 128 are formed in a flat plate shape having planes substantially orthogonal to each other in the left-right direction.

A decorative portion 125a is provided on the right side surface portion 125. The decorative portion 125a is formed by applying a graining process to a part of the outer surface of the right side surface portion 125. The decorative portion 125a receives light emitted from a light source (not shown) provided behind the right engaging hole 114a of the decorative frame 101 and emits light. In the right side surface portion 125, the region where the decorative portion 125a is not provided is a translucent portion that transmits light.

Further, the left side surface portion 124 is provided with a decorative portion (not shown) similar to the decorative portion 125a of the right side surface portion 125. The decorative portion (not shown) of the left side surface portion 124 receives light emitted from a light source (not shown) provided behind the left engaging hole 113a of the decorative frame 101 and emits light. In the left side surface portion 124, the region where the decorative portion is not provided is a translucent portion that transmits light.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the decorative frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and effect switches 22L and 22R. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, the lamps 21a and 21b in FIG. The lamp group 21 is composed of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect. The effect switches 22L and 22R are provided on the left and right side portions of the decorative frame 101, respectively.

Further, the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, and the right movable unit 107 are attached to the decorative frame 101.

The central movable unit 105 is arranged in the central portion above the decorative frame 101, and has a movable part 309 described later. For example, when a specific effect is performed, the central movable unit 105 rotates the movable part 309 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about an axis extending in the left-right direction, and from below the decorative cover 364. Lower. As a result, the movable component 309 moves to the effect position (see FIG. 4) that covers a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the movable component 309 is composed of the character unit 323, the arch cover 324, and the light emitting display unit 325. When the movable component 309 is arranged at the effect position, the character unit 323 and the arch cover 324 , The light emitting display unit 325 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachislot machine 1. Further, although not shown, the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 are individually formed with transmission regions for transmitting light emitted from LEDs (not shown) provided on the back surfaces thereof. There is. In particular, the light emitting display unit 325 is formed with a plurality of (for example, three) transmission regions in parallel so that a plurality of stages (for example, three stages) of lighting display can be performed stepwise.

The left movable unit 106 is arranged on the left side in the decorative frame 101, and has a left door 188 described later. Further, the right movable unit 107 is arranged on the right side in the decorative frame 101, and has a right door 189 described later. The left door 188 and the right door 189 are formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape having an appropriate thickness, and one of the planes faces forward at the initial position.

The left movable unit 106 rotates the left door 188 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about an axis extending in the vertical direction, for example, when a predetermined effect is performed. Further, the right movable unit 107 rotates the right door 189 at the initial position around an axis extending in the vertical direction, for example, when a predetermined effect is performed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, one of the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated, or both the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated when a predetermined effect is performed. Good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a pedestal portion 13 is formed on the waist panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15A, 1BET button 15B, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, settlement button 18) to be operated by the player. ing.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used for one game up to a predetermined number (for example, 3), and the excess of the predetermined number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (so-called credit). function).

The MAX bet button 15A and the 1BET button 15B are provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Further, the settlement button 18 is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 7) composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). This 7-segment display 6 provides information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits), and the like. Display digitally.

A medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 24 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 33, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. Further, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the cabinet 2a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface on the front side open. A main board 31 constituting a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

Three reels (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 6, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 7) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. ..

A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one is provided in the lower portion of the cabinet 2a. Further, on one side of the hopper 33 (on the left side in the example shown in FIG. 6) in the cabinet 2a, a power supply device 4 for supplying necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1 is provided. ..

A sub-board 32 constituting a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 7 and 8) described later is provided on the upper portion of the front door 2b on the back surface side (the portion opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 42 will be described later.

Further, a selector 35 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, etc. of medals inserted from the outside are appropriate via the medal insertion slot 14 (see FIG. 2), and the hopper determines that the medals are determined to be appropriate. I will guide you to 33. Further, although not shown in FIG. 6, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 7) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machines]
Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an overall configuration of a circuit included in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 shows an internal configuration of a sub-control circuit in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram. The pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control circuit 41, a sub-control circuit 42, and a peripheral device (actuator) electrically connected to these.

<Main control circuit>
The main control circuit 41 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. Includes 66.

The microcomputer 50 is composed of a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

The main ROM 52 stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, data tables such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. .. The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 51 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

Various switches, sensors, and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and the like to control the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R.

The stop switch 17S detects that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation). The start switch 16S detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The checkout switch 18S detects that the checkout button has been pressed by the player.

The medal sensor 35S detects that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 has passed through the selector 35. Further, the bet switch 15S detects that the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) is pressed by the player.

Further, as peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, a 7-segment display 6 and a hopper 33. Further, a drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects a reel index indicating that the reel has rotated once for each reel by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. Further, the driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor to rotate the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many reels there are symbols). Only rotated).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, each time the output of the pulse of a predetermined number of times (for example, 17 times) required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to ". 1 ”is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged to the outside from the hopper 33 has reached a predetermined number of payouts. To do.

Although not shown, an external centralized terminal plate is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. The external centralized terminal board receives signals such as the number of medals inserted / paid out from the main control circuit 41, the number of games played, and information on whether or not the bonus is activated, and displays the signals such as the number of games played and the number of bonus operations. It is output as an external signal to an external display or the host computer of the amusement park. The external display is installed above the pachislot machine 1, for example, to update the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, or to notify the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

<Sub-control circuit>
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the sub-control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. .. As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86. Further, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, an A / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, a central movable unit drive circuit 96, a left movable unit drive circuit 97, and a right movable unit. The unit drive circuit 98 and the rotary light drive circuit 99 are included.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, an effect random value is extracted, and an effect content (effect data) is determined. An effect registration task for registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by the lamp group 21, and a speaker. A program such as a voice control task for controlling sound output by 20L and 20R is included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting various production contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and sound data related to BGM and sound effects. Various storage areas such as a storage area for storing the data and a storage area for storing lamp data related to the pattern of turning on and off the light are included.

The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a liquid crystal display device 11, speakers 20L, 20R, a lamp group 21, a central movable unit 105, a left movable unit 106, a right movable unit 107, and a rotating light 543. Peripheral devices such as are connected. That is, the operation of these peripheral devices is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and the created image is the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed by.

Further, the sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the A / D converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM by the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

The sub CPU 81 and the central movable unit drive circuit 96 drive the central movable unit 105 according to the central movable unit drive data specified by the effect content. That is, the central movable unit 105 is driven when a specific effect is performed to move the movable component 309 to a position that covers a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 81 and the left movable unit drive circuit 97 drive the left movable unit 106 according to the left movable unit drive data specified by the effect content. The sub CPU 81 and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 drive the right movable unit 107 according to the right movable unit drive data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 81 and the revolving light driving circuit 99 drive the revolving light 543 according to the revolving light driving data specified by the effect content.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 is a state in which, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 81 notifies the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player according to the determined internal winning combination. An advantageous game state control means for controlling the state is configured. Such an advantageous gaming state is referred to as "AT".

[Transition of game state]
Next, the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 51 shifts two gaming states, a general gaming state (RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state) and a BB gaming state (RB gaming state), as the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1.

<Transition of general game state>
As shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 51 takes either the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state as the general gaming state. In the RT0 gaming state, when the bonus combination (BB in the present embodiment), which is the operating combination of the bonus, is internally won, the gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state.

The RT0 gaming state is a replay low probability state (low RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay winning combination, which is the operating combination of the replay, is relatively lower than that of the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively higher than that of the RT0 gaming state.

Here, the RT1 gaming state does not directly shift to the RT0 gaming state, but the BB is won in the RT1 gaming state, the BB gaming state shifts to the BB gaming state, and the BB gaming state ends, so that the RT0 gaming state is resumed. It will be migrated.

In addition, the BB is always in an internal winning state from the internal winning to the winning. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as a "BB carry-over state". That is, in the present embodiment, the RT1 gaming state and the BB carry-over state have an equivalent relationship.

The RT1 game state is not an RT managed by the number of games, but a game state in which the game shifts only when the above-mentioned transition conditions are satisfied. In that sense, the RT1 gaming state is infinite RT.

<Transition of BB game state>
Further, when the BB wins a prize, the main CPU 51 shifts the gaming state to the BB gaming state. In the present embodiment, the BB game state is always controlled during the RB game state, and when the BB end condition is satisfied, specifically, a specified number of medals (75 in the present embodiment) in the BB game state. ) Is paid out, the BB game state and the RB game state are terminated, and the game shifts to the RT0 game state.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the internal lottery table for general gaming state described later in FIG. 15, in the RT1 gaming state, one of the internal winning combinations is always determined by lottery. That is, the unit game in which the BB is carried over and neither the small winning combination nor the replay winning combination is won occurs only in the unit game in which the BB is internally won. Further, the internal winning combination can be roughly divided into a replay combination, a small combination, and a bonus combination, but as shown in FIG. 19 described later, in the present embodiment, the replay combination and the small combination are more than the BB. It is configured to be preferentially stopped and displayed.

Therefore, if the BB is internally won, but the BB cannot be won in the unit game, the entire memory is stored until a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (for example, a backup error of the main RAM 33 at the time of turning on the power). (Initialization of area) RT1 The game state will continue.

The transition of the gaming state is not limited to the above. For example, a plurality of combinations of bell rip symbols, which will be described later, are provided, and when the normal rips 1 to 4 or bell rips 1 to 4 described later are won, the combination of the symbols to be won is different depending on the stop operation order, so that one bell lip symbol can be used. If the combination of the above is won, it may be shifted to the above-mentioned RT1 gaming state, and if the combination of other Bell Lip symbols is won, it may be configured to shift to the above-mentioned RT0 gaming state.

In this case, when the sub CPU 81 controls the advantageous gaming state, first, the stop operation order in which the combination of the symbols of the one bell lip wins is notified, and the stop operation is performed according to this notification. It shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Then, in the RT1 game state, the stop operation order in which other combinations of Belllip symbols do not win is notified, and the stop operation order in which the most medals are paid out is notified for each small winning combination. As a result, it is possible to configure an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player as well.

[Data table stored in the main ROM]
Next, various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol position data "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "Red 7", "BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Cherry", "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B", "Watermelon C", "White Blank" and "Purple Blank". ”Is included.

Here, "watermelon A", "watermelon B", and "watermelon C" need only be able to be identified as having different symbols internally by the main CPU 51, and in the present embodiment, they are like the same symbol. The design should be recognizable by the player. Hereinafter, "watermelon A", "watermelon B" and "watermelon C" are collectively referred to as "watermelon".

<Design code table>
As shown in FIG. 11, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and in the present embodiment, it is distinguished by 2-byte (16-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 11 represents a symbol code as data for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 has been described as representing an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, but is actually stored in the main ROM 52. The symbol arrangement table represents an arrangement of symbol codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R.

In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are "Red 7", "BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Cherry", "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B", and "Watermelon B" as described above. There are 10 types of "watermelon C", "white blank" and "purple blank".

In the symbol code table, "1" is assigned as the symbol code for the "red 7" symbol. Further, "2" is assigned as a symbol code for the "BAR" symbol. In addition, "3" is assigned as a symbol code for the "replay" symbol.

Similarly, "4" to "10" are the symbol codes for the symbols "bell", "cherry", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", "watermelon C", "white blank" and "purple blank", respectively. Assigned.

<Design combination table>
In the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the winning operation flag and the number of payouts are associated with the combination of symbols identified by the storage area identification data represented by 27 bytes.

The winning operation flag is data assigned corresponding to a combination of unique symbols for representing a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "winning combination"), and includes 1-byte (8-bit) data and a storage area type. I'm out. The storage area type is data for distinguishing 1-byte data. The 1-byte data includes data corresponding to a combination of a plurality of symbols. The combination of each symbol is distinguished by the storage area type and the 1-byte data.

In the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, in order to make the invention easier to understand, the name (content) of the winning combination is associated with the winning operation flag for each combination of symbols.

The payout number is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the player corresponding to each combination of symbols. When the combination of symbols lined up along the effective line matches the "combination of symbols" in the symbol combination table, the number of medals ejected or credits driven by the hopper device 33 is counted based on the corresponding number of payouts. Credit counters are added.

FIG. 12 shows a symbol combination table related to the bonus combination. If the combination of "Watermelon B-BAR-White Blank" symbols, which is called "BB" and represents a winning combination, is displayed along the valid line in the general gaming state (RT1 gaming state), the medal There is no payout, but it means that you have won the BB. That is, if "BB" wins a prize while in the general gaming state (RT1 gaming state), the game shifts to the BB gaming state.

FIG. 13 shows a symbol combination table related to the replay combination. When the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 13 is displayed along the valid line, it means that the medal is not paid out, but the winning combination of the re-game is won. That is, if the replay combination wins, the replay can be performed in the next game.

In FIG. 13, when a combination of "replay-replay-replay" symbols representing a winning combination called "middle rip" is displayed along the effective line, "replay-replay-replay" is displayed in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "Replay" is complete.

When the combination of the symbols of "Bell-Replay-Red 7" representing the winning combination called "Cross-up Lip 1" is displayed along the effective line, "Cross-up Lip 1" is displayed upward to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "Replay" is complete. The same applies to "Cross-up Lip 2" to "Cross-Up Lip 4" as in "Cross-Up Lip 1".

When the combination of the symbols of "Watermelon A-Replay-Watermelon A" representing the winning combination called "Cross Down Lip 1" is displayed along the effective line, it goes down to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "Replay" is complete. The same applies to "Cross Down Lip 2" to "Cross Down Lip 6" as in "Cross Down Lip 1".

When the combination of "Replay-Bell-Cherry" symbols, which represent the winning combination called "Bell Lip", is displayed along the effective line, the "Bells" are aligned downward to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, only the above-mentioned center line is an effective line, but the combination of symbols related to the replay combination is configured as shown in FIG. 13, and will be described later in the description of FIG. By configuring the combination of symbols related to the small role (for example, upper bells 1 to 12, cross-up bells 1 to 9, lower bells 1 to 3 and cross-down watermelons 1 to 4, etc.) in the same manner, it is as if five lines (for example). It is possible to impress the player as if the center line aligned in the middle row, the top line aligned in the upper row, the bottom line aligned in the lower row, the cross-down line aligned in the downward right, and the cross-up line aligned in the upward right are effective lines. You can do it.

When a combination of "Replay-Replay-Cherry" symbols, which is called "Chance Lip A1" and represents a winning combination, is displayed along the valid line, "Bell" is displayed in the upper part of the display window 4L and the lower part of the display window 4C. "Bell" is displayed in, and "Bell" is displayed in the lower part of the display window 4R. That is, two "bells" are displayed on at least one of the above-mentioned five lines (for example, a bottom line aligned in the lower row or a cross-down line aligned in the lower right) (hereinafter, "tempai"). The remaining one "bell" is displayed on the other line (hereinafter referred to as "tempai off"). For "Chance Lip A2" to "Chance Lip A5" and "Chance Lip B1" to "Chance Lip B3", the "bell" is removed from the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R in the same way as "Chance Lip A1". Is displayed.

When the combination of the symbols of "Bell-Watermelon A-Watermelon A" representing the winning combination called "Special Lip A1" is displayed along the effective line, "Watermelon" is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. It is displayed when the tempai is off. The same applies to "special lip A2" to "special lip A6" and "special lip B" as well as "special lip A1".

When the combination of the symbols of "BAR-BAR-BAR" representing the winning combination called "BAR Lip A" is displayed along the valid line, "BAR" is displayed in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. Align. In addition, when the combination of the symbols of "Replay-BAR-Cherry" representing the winning combination called "BAR Lip E" is displayed along the effective line, "BAR Lip E" is displayed upward to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "BAR" may be available.

When the combination of the symbols of "BAR-BAR-Watermelon A" representing the winning combination called "BAR Lip B1" is displayed along the effective line, "BAR" is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. It is displayed as off. The same applies to "BAR rip B2", "BAR rip B3", "BAR rip C", "BAR rip D1", and "BAR rip D2" as well as "BAR rip B1".

When the combination of the symbols of "Bell-BAR-Watermelon A" representing the winning combination called "BAR Lip B4" is displayed along the effective line, "Replay" is displayed in the lower row in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. Are available. The same applies to "BAR Lip B5" and "BAR Lip B6" as well as "BAR Lip B4".

When the combination of the symbols of "cherry-ANY-ANY" representing the winning combination called "cherry lip A" is displayed along the effective line, "cherry" is displayed in the middle of the display window 4L. In addition, "ANY" indicates that any symbol may be used. That is, in "Cherry Lip A", if "cherry" is displayed in the middle of the display window 4L, it is a combination of symbols whose winning is confirmed regardless of the symbols displayed on the display windows 4C and 4R. ing.

When the combination of the symbols of "Watermelon A-Red 7-Cherry" representing the winning combination called "Cherry Lip B1" is displayed along the effective line, "Red 7" is displayed in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. May be displayed out of the tempai, but basically it is displayed when the "cherry" symbol in the above-mentioned "cherry lip A" cannot be displayed in the middle of the display window 4L. It is specified as a combination of. The same applies to "Cherry Lip B2" to "Cherry Lip B8" and "Cherry Lip C" as in "Cherry Lip B1".

14a and 14b show a symbol combination table related to a small winning combination with medals paid out. When the combination of symbols shown in FIGS. 14a and 14b is displayed along the valid line, the number of medals to be paid out associated with the combination of symbols is paid out.

When the combination of the symbols of "Replay-Watermelon A-Watermelon A" representing the winning combination called "Upper Bell 1" is displayed along the effective line, the "Bell" is displayed in the upper row in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. ], And 7 medals will be paid out. The same applies to the "upper bell 2" to the "upper bell 12" as in the "upper bell 1".

When the combination of the symbols of "Watermelon A-Bell-Watermelon A" representing the winning combination called "Cross-up Bell 1" is displayed along the effective line, it rises to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "Bells" are lined up and 7 medals are paid out. The same applies to "Cross-up bell 2" to "Cross-up bell 9" as in "Cross-up bell 1".

When a combination of "BAR-bell-replay" symbols representing a winning combination called "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1" is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer A2" to "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer A9" and "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1" to "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer B9" as well as "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1".

As will be described later in the explanation of FIG. 19, the "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer" means, for example, when "middle left and right cross-up bell 1" is determined as the internal winning combination as the "pushing order small combination". When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the stop operation order of "middle left and right", one of "Cross-up bell 1" to "Cross-up bell 9" wins and 7 medals are paid out. However, when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the stop operation order of "middle right left", the stop operation order of the first stop operation is correct, but the stop operation of the second stop operation is correct. Since the order is incorrect, it indicates that any one of "Middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1" to "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer A9" wins and one medal is paid out.

When a combination of "watermelon A-watermelon A-bell" symbols representing a winning combination called "right 1st incorrect answer A1" is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to "right 1st incorrect answer A2" to "right 1st incorrect answer A4" and "right 1st incorrect answer B1" to "right 1st incorrect answer B4" as well as "right 1st incorrect answer A1".

As will be described later in the explanation of FIG. 19, the "right 1st incorrect answer" means, for example, when "middle left and right cross-up bell 1" is determined as the internal winning combination as the "pushing order small combination". When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated in the stop operation order of "middle left and right", one of "Cross-up bell 1" to "Cross-up bell 9" wins and 7 medals are paid out. However, when "right", that is, when the stop button 17R is first stopped, the stop operation order is incorrect. Therefore, when "missing" described later does not occur, "right 1st incorrect answer" It indicates that either "A1" to "right 1st incorrect answer A4" or "right 1st incorrect answer B1" to "right 1st incorrect answer B4" wins and one medal is paid out.

When a combination of "bell-bell-bell" symbols, which is called a "middle bell" and represents a winning combination, is displayed along the effective line, the "bells" are aligned in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. , 7 medals will be paid out.

When a combination of "watermelon A-purple blank-bell" symbols representing a winning combination called "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1" is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to "right 1st2nd incorrect answer A2" to "right 1st2nd incorrect answer A6" and "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B1" to "right 1st2nd incorrect answer B6" as well as "right 1st2nd incorrect answer A1".

The "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer" is, as will be described later in the explanation of FIG. 19, for example, when "right left middle middle bell 1" is determined as the internal winning combination as the "pushing order small combination", "right left". If the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the "middle" stop operation order, the "middle bell" will win and seven medals will be paid out, but the "right middle left" stop operation When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in order, the stop operation order of the first stop operation is correct, but the stop operation order of the second stop operation is incorrect, so "Right 1st 2nd is not correct". It indicates that any one of "correct answer A1" to "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A6" wins and one medal is paid out.

However, for "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1" to "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B6", "middle left and right lower bell 1" to "middle left and right lower bell 3" and "middle right left lower bell 1" are used as "pushing order small roles". ~ If any of the "middle right left lower bell 3" is determined as the internal winning combination, and the "right", that is, the stop button 17R is first stopped, the stop operation order is incorrect. In this case, "missing", which will be described later, does not occur, and one of "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1" to "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B6" wins and one medal is paid out. Therefore, it can be said that the above-mentioned internal winning combination is the "right 1st incorrect answer" except that the "missing" described later does not occur.

In addition, one of "Right Left Middle Lower Bell 1" to "Right Left Middle Lower Bell 3" and "Right Middle Left Lower Bell 1" to "Right Middle Left Lower Bell 3" is used as an internal winning medal. When it is determined, "medium", that is, when the stop button 17C is first stopped, the stop operation order is incorrect, but in this case, "missing" described later does not occur. Any one of "Right 1st 2nd Incorrect Answer B1" to "Right 1st 2nd Incorrect Answer B6" will win a prize and one medal will be paid out. Therefore, it can be said that the above-mentioned internal winning combination is the "middle 1st incorrect answer" described later, except that the "missing" described later does not occur.

If a combination of "bell-cherry-BAR" symbols representing a winning combination called "middle 1st incorrect answer A1" is displayed along the valid line, one medal will be paid out. "Medium 1st incorrect answer A2" to "Medium 1st incorrect answer A4" and "Medium 1st incorrect answer B1" to "Medium 1st incorrect answer B4" are the same as "Medium 1st incorrect answer A1".

As will be described later in the explanation of FIG. 19, the "middle 1st incorrect answer" means, for example, when "right and left middle middle bell 1" is determined as the internal winning combination as the "pushing order small combination", "right and left". When the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated in the stop operation order of "middle", the "middle bell" wins and seven medals are paid out, but "middle", that is, the stop button 17C When the first stop operation is performed, the stop operation order is incorrect. Therefore, when the "missing" described later does not occur, "middle 1st incorrect answer A1" to "middle 1st incorrect answer A4" or "middle 1st incorrect answer A4" or " It indicates that any one of "Medium 1st incorrect answer B1" to "Medium 1st incorrect answer B4" wins and one medal is paid out.

When the combination of "Watermelon A-Replay-Cherry" symbols called "Lower Bell 1" is displayed along the effective line, "Bell" is displayed in the lower row in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. 7 medals will be paid out. The "lower bell 2" and "lower bell 3" are the same as those of "lower bell 1".

When the combination of the symbols of "Red 7-Watermelon A-Bell" representing the winning combination called "Crossdown Watermelon 1" is displayed along the effective line, it goes down to the right in the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "Watermelon" is available and 3 medals are paid out. The same applies to "Cross-down watermelon 2" to "Cross-down watermelon 4" as in "Cross-down watermelon 1".

When the combination of the symbols of "Watermelon B-Watermelon A-Watermelon A" representing the winning combination called "Middle watermelon 1" is displayed along the effective line, "Watermelon B-Watermelon A-Watermelon A" is displayed in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R. "Watermelon" will be available and 3 medals will be paid out. The same applies to "middle watermelon 2" to "middle watermelon 6" as in "middle watermelon 1".

When the combination of "BAR-cherry-white blank" symbols called "Kaku Cherry A1-1" representing the winning combination is displayed along the valid line, "cherry" is displayed in the lower row in the display window 4L. And three medals are paid out. "Kaku Cherry A1-2"-"Kaku Cherry A1-8", "Kaku Cherry B1-1"-"Kaku Cherry B1-4", "Kaku Cherry B2-1"-"Kaku Cherry B2-24", "Kaku Cherry B2-24" Cherry B3-1 "to" Kaku Cherry B3-4 "," Kaku Cherry B4-1 "to" Kaku Cherry B4-3 "," Kaku Cherry B5-1 "to" Kaku Cherry B5-4 "," Kaku Cherry C1 " -1 "to" Kaku Cherry C1-8 "," Kaku Cherry C2-1 "to" Kaku Cherry C2-12 "," Kaku Cherry C3-1 "to" Kaku Cherry C3-6 "," Kaku Cherry C4-1 " As for "Kaku Cherry C4-3", "Cherry" is displayed in the upper or lower row in the display window 4L as in "Kaku Cherry A1-1".

When a combination of "watermelon B-bell-bell" symbols representing a winning combination called "special role A" is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to "special role B" and "special role C" as in "special role A".

Here, as for the "special role", when "weak cherry", "strong cherry 1", and "strong cherry 2" are determined as the internal winning role, none of the above-mentioned "corner cherries" can be won. In that case, that is, when "cherry" cannot be displayed in the upper or lower row in the display window 4L according to the timing of the stop operation, "special combination" is displayed with priority over "BB". It is defined as a combination of symbols for controlling so that "BB" is not won by performing stop control.

In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols related to the replay combination and the combination of symbols related to the small combination are given the above-mentioned names so as to be distinguished from others, but the names are not necessarily the combinations of the symbols. Does not limit the role of.

<Internal lottery table>
In the plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a lottery value and a data pointer for each game state are associated with the winning number. The internal lottery table is usually stored in the main ROM 52 for each set value (for example, set values 1 to 6) of the pachi-slot machine 1. However, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, one internal lottery table will be used for each description.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and whether or not the subtraction result is negative. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the number defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data (that is, the data pointer) will be determined. When the number of times of the determination processing as to whether or not the subtraction result is negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery processing becomes "missing".

The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)". In the present embodiment, by properly using a plurality of types of internal lottery tables, the types of internal winning combinations and the winning probabilities to be determined are changed, and as a result, the expectations held by the player are undulated.

The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data for designating the internal winning combination defined by the internal winning combination determination table described later.

That is, the data pointer is data used for determining the storage area type and 1-byte data in the small winning combination / replay winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17 and the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. .. As for the data pointer, a small winning combination / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each winning number.

The method of internal lottery processing is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, a lottery random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is used for lottery according to each winning number. The internal lottery may be performed by sequentially adding the values and determining whether the result of the addition is a predetermined value (for example, whether the value is equal to or more than a predetermined value for each winning number).

(Internal lottery table for general game status)
As shown in FIG. 15, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state referred to in the general gaming state defines the lottery value of each winning number in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state. In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the winning numbers "1" to "45" in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state are associated with the small winning combination / replay data pointers "1" to "45", respectively. In addition, "(between BB flags)" in the RT1 gaming state is synonymous with the above-mentioned "BB carry-over state".

The lottery values of the winning numbers "1" to "16" and "46" are different between the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, and the lottery values of the winning numbers "17" to "45" are the same. The winning number "46" is associated with "1" as a bonus data pointer, and when BB is determined as an internal winning combination, only BB is determined as an internal winning combination (single winning). It is set.

Specifically, in the RT0 game state, the lottery values of the winning numbers "1" to "16" are set to "8978", and the lottery value of the winning numbers "46" is set to "5851". ing. On the other hand, in the RT1 gaming state, when the lottery values of the winning numbers "1" to "16" are added up, it is set to "14829", which is set higher than in the RT0 gaming state, and the lottery of the winning number "46". The value is set to "0". That is, the lottery value corresponding to the difference of the winning numbers "46" is assigned to the lottery values of the winning numbers "1" to "16".

(Internal lottery table for RB game status)
As shown in FIG. 16, the internal lottery table for the RB game state referred to in the RB game state defines the lottery value of each winning number in the RB game state. In the internal lottery table for the RB game state, the winning numbers "1" and "2" are associated with the small winning combination / replay data pointers "46" and "47", respectively. In the present embodiment, since the RB game state is always in the RB game state, the internal lottery table for the RB game state can be rephrased as the internal lottery table for the BB game state.

<Internal winning role determination table for small roles / replays>
In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17, data for identifying a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted is associated with the small winning combination / replay data pointer. ing.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17, for convenience, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted for the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and the name (content) of the winning combination and the winning combination are displayed. It is associated with the name (remarks) of the internal winning combination.

Here, as shown in FIG. 17, by associating a plurality of combinations of symbols (winning operation flags) for which winning is permitted with one data pointer, a plurality of combinations of symbols are associated with one internal lottery process. It is possible to allow the winning of the combination of symbols (winning operation flag). These internal lottery methods are referred to as "simultaneous winning" method and "overlapping winning" method.

In the present embodiment, a combination of one symbol (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted can be defined as "internal winning combination", and winning is permitted for one data pointer. A combination of a plurality of symbols (winning operation flag) can be defined as an internal winning combination, but in FIGS. 17 to 20, the latter is defined as an internal winning combination.

In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "0" is associated with "loss".

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "1" indicates "normal lip 1" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "middle rip", "cross-up rip 1 to 4", "cross-down rip 1 to 6" and "bell rip" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "2" indicates "normal lip 2" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "middle rip", "cross-up rip 1 to 4", "cross-down rip 1 to 6", "bell rip" and "special rip A1 to 6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "3" indicates "normal lip 3" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "middle rip", "cross-up rip 1 to 4", "cross-down rip 1 to 6", "bell rip" and "special rip B" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "4" indicates "normal lip 4" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "middle rip", "cross-up rip 1 to 4", "cross-down rip 1 to 6", "bell rip", "special rip A1 to 6" and "special rip B" are associated with each other. Has been done.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "5" indicates "Belllip 1" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize ( As the winning operation flag), "middle rip" and "bell rip" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "6" indicates "Belllip 2" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize ( As the winning operation flag), "middle rip", "bell rip" and "special rip A1 to 6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "7" indicates "Belllip 3" as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols that are allowed to win the prize ( As the winning operation flag), "middle rip", "bell rip" and "special rip B" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "8" indicates "Belllip 4" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize ( As the winning operation flag), "middle rip", "bell rip", "special rip A1-6" and "special rip B" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "9" indicates "chance lip 1" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "chance rips A1 to 5" and "chance rips B1 to 3" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "10" indicates "chance lip 2" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "chance lip A1-5", "chance lip B1-3" and "bell lip" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "11" indicates a "strong chance lip" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "middle rip", "special rip A1-6" and "special rip B" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "12" indicates "cherry lip" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize ( "BAR rip B1-6", "BAR rip C", "BAR rip D1, 2", "BAR rip E", "cherry rip A" and "cherry rip B1-8" are associated as the winning operation flag). Has been done.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "13" indicates "strong cherry lip" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "BAR rip B1-6", "BAR rip C", "BAR rip D1, 2", "BAR rip E", "cherry rip A", "cherry rip B1-8", " "BAR Lip A" and "Cherry Lip C" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "14" indicates "BAR Lip 1" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. "Middle rip", "Cross-up rip 1 to 4", "BAR rip A", "BAR rip B1 to 6", "BAR rip C" and "BAR rip D1 and 2" are supported as (winning operation flag). It is attached.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "15" indicates "BAR Lip 2" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "middle rip", "cross-up rip 1 to 4", "BAR rip A", "BAR rip B1 to 6", "BAR rip C", "BAR rip D1, 2", " "Bell lip" and "BAR lip E" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "16" indicates "fake BAR lip" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "middle rip", "cross-up rip 1 to 4" and "BAR rip D1 and 2" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "17" indicates "middle left / right cross-up bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 1", "cross-up bell 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "18" indicates "middle left / right cross-up bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 2", "cross-up bell 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "19" indicates "middle left / right cross-up bell 3" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 3", "cross-up bell 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "20" indicates "middle right / left cross-up bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 4", "cross-up bell 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer B1-4" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "21" indicates "middle right / left cross-up bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 5", "cross-up bell 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer B1-4" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "22" indicates "middle right / left cross-up bell 3" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 6", "cross-up bell 1-9", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" and "right 1st incorrect answer B1-4" are associated with each other. ..

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "23" indicates "right, left, middle, middle bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "upper bell 7", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "24" indicates "right, left, middle, middle bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "upper bell 8", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "25" indicates "right / left middle middle bell 3" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "upper bell 9", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect answer A1-4" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "26" indicates "right middle left middle bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 10", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect answer B1-4" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "27" indicates "right middle left middle bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 11", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect answer B1-4" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "28" indicates "right middle left middle bell 3" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bell 12", "middle bell", "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-6" and "middle 1st incorrect answer B1-4" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "29" indicates "middle left / right lower bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination (winning operation flag), "upper bells 1 and 2", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-9" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-6" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "30" indicates "middle left / right lower bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As the combination (winning operation flag), "upper bells 3 and 4", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-9" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-6" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "31" indicates "middle left / right lower bell 3" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination (winning operation flag), "upper bells 5 and 6", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-9" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-6" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "32" indicates "middle right left lower bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination (winning operation flag), "upper bells 7 and 8", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-9" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-6" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "33" indicates "middle right left lower bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As the combination (winning operation flag), "upper bells 9, 10", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-9" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-6" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "34" indicates "middle right left lower bell 3" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "upper bells 11 and 12", "lower bells 1 to 3", "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1 to 9" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "35" indicates "right, left, middle, and lower bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "upper bells 1 and 2", "lower bells 1 to 3" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "36" indicates "right, left, middle, and lower bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "upper bells 3 and 4", "lower bells 1 to 3" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "37" indicates "right, left, middle, and lower bells 3" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "upper bells 5 and 6", "lower bells 1 to 3" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "38" indicates "right middle left lower bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bells 7 and 8", "lower bells 1 to 3" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "39" indicates "right middle left lower bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bells 9, 10", "lower bells 1 to 3", and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "40" indicates "right middle left lower bell 3" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "upper bells 11 and 12", "lower bells 1 to 3" and "right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1 to 6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "41" indicates a "strong bell" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize ( As the winning operation flag), "upper bells 1 to 12," "cross-up bells 1 to 9," and "lower bells 1 to 3" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "42" indicates "watermelon" as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols that are allowed to win (winning). As the operation flag), "cross-down watermelons 1 to 4" and "middle stage watermelons 1 to 6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "43" indicates "weak cherry" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize ( "Kaku cherry A1-1-8", "Kaku cherry B3-1-4", "Kaku cherry C1-1-8", "Kaku cherry C2-1-12", "Kaku cherry C3" -1 to 6 ”,“ Kaku Cherry C4-1-3 ”,“ Special role A ”,“ Special role B ”and“ Special role C ”are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "44" indicates "strong cherry 1" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "Kaku cherry A1-1-8", "Kaku cherry B1-1-4", "Kaku cherry B2-1-24", "Kaku cherry B3-1-4", "Kaku cherry" "B4-1-3", "Kaku cherry B5-1-4", "Kaku cherry C2-1-12", "Special role A", "Special role B" and "Special role C" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "45" indicates "strong cherry 2" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize. As (winning operation flag), "Kaku cherry A1-1-8", "Kaku cherry B1-1-4", "Kaku cherry B2-1-24", "Kaku cherry B3-1-4", "Kaku cherry" "B4-1-3", "Kaku cherry B5-1-4", "Kaku cherry C2-1-12", "Special combination A" and "Special combination C" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "46" indicates "RB small / medium winning combination A" as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is allowed to win. As a combination (winning operation flag), "middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" is associated.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "47" indicates "RB small / small winning combination B" as the internal winning combination, and the winning symbol is allowed to win. As a combination (winning operation flag), all small combinations (that is, combinations of all the symbols shown in FIGS. 14a and 14b) are associated with each other.

Here, referring to the internal lottery table for the RB game state shown in FIG. 16, the “RB small and medium-sized combination A” corresponds to the winning number “1” and is internally won with a winning probability of 39425/65536. On the other hand, referring to the internal lottery table for the general game state shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability of "medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" associated with "RB small and medium winning combination A" is 2734 × 6/65536 = 16404. / 65536.

Further, referring to the internal lottery table for the RB game state shown in FIG. 16, "RB small and medium-sized winning combination B" corresponds to the winning number "2", and the internal winning probability is 16406/655536. On the other hand, referring to the internal lottery table for the general game state shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability is the highest among the combinations of symbols associated with "RB small and medium-sized winning combination B" (winning operation flags). Is the "cross-up bells 1 to 9" corresponding to the winning numbers "17" to "22" and "41", and the winning probability is (2734 x 6 + 1) / 65536 = 16405/65536.

Therefore, in the RB game state, a higher winning probability than in the general gaming state, that is, a more advantageous winning probability for the player is set in the unit of the combination of symbols (winning operation flag) for which the winning is permitted.

<Internal winning combination decision table for bonus>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, data for identifying the internal winning combination is associated with the bonus data pointer.

Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, for convenience, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted from the bonus data pointer, and the name (content) of the winning combination and the name of the internal winning combination ( Remarks) is associated with.

In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "0" is associated with "loss". Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "1" indicates "BB" as the internal winning combination, and as a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag), " BB ”is associated with it.

[Relationship between stop operation order and winning combination for internal winning combination]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the relationship between the stop operation order for the internal winning combination and the winning combination will be described.

In FIG. 19, as the stop operation order, "left middle right" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17L, the stop button 17C, and the stop button 17R, and "left and right middle" means the stop button 17L. It means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17R and the stop button 17C, and "middle left and right" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17C, the stop button 17L, and the stop button 17R. "Right and left" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of stop button 17C, stop button 17R, and stop button 17L, and "right and left middle" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of stop button 17R, stop button 17L, and stop button 17C. That means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 17R, the stop button 17C, and the stop button 17L.

<Overview of reel stop>
In the present embodiment, a plurality of combinations of symbols that are allowed to win a prize for one internal winning combination are associated with each other, and at what timing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are operated (stop). Depending on the operation timing) and the order in which the operations are performed (stop operation order), the winning combination finally displayed may be controlled to change.

That is, regarding which symbol combination is finally displayed on the effective line (in other words, as basic information when the main CPU 51 executes the reel stop control), the following It is determined based on the three elements of.

The first element is the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "miss" (the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "0"), the combination of symbols related to any of the replay winning combinations or the combination of symbols related to the small winning combination Will not eventually appear on the valid line.

The second element is the player's stop operation timing (in other words, the position of the symbol when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols, even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery processing, the winning is permitted. If the symbols that make up the combination of symbols are arranged in excess of four symbols, the combination of symbols that is allowed to win may not be displayed depending on the timing of the player's stop operation. .. This is called "missing", and in FIG. 19, the notation "or loss" means that there is this "missing". Therefore, in the figure, when it is not described as "or lost", it means that at least one of the combinations of the symbols of the indicated winning combinations is displayed and there is no "missing". ..

The third element is the player's stop operation order. For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "normal lip 1" (the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "1"), regardless of the stop operation order, regardless of the stop operation timing. , As shown in FIG. 19, the combination of symbols related to any of the replay combinations is displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, if the result of the internal lottery process is "middle left / right cross-up bell 1" (the value of the data pointer for small combination / replay is "17"), and the stop operation order is "middle left / right", Regardless of the stop operation timing, if any combination of symbols of "Cross-up bells 1 to 9" is displayed on the valid line and the stop operation order is "middle right left", regardless of the stop operation timing. , "Medium 1st 2nd incorrect answer A1-9" will be displayed on the valid line. On the other hand, when the stop operation order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle", the stop operation timing is the timing at which the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of "upper bell 1" can be displayed on the effective line. Only in the case, when the combination of the symbols of "upper bell 1" is displayed on the valid line and the stop operation order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", the stop operation timing is "right 1st incorrect answer". Only when the timing is such that the symbols that make up any of the symbols in A1 to 4 "can be displayed on the effective line, the combination of any of the symbols on the right 1st incorrect answer A1 to 4" is on the effective line. Is displayed.

Here, the internal winning combination "middle left and right cross-up bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "17"), "middle left / right cross-up bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "17"). 18 ")," Middle left and right cross-up bell 3 "(small role / replay data pointer value is" 19 ")," middle left and right lower bell 1 "(small role / replay data pointer value is" 29 ") , "Middle left and right lower bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "30") and "Middle left and right lower bell 3" (small role / replay data pointer value is "31") are stopped. Focusing on the operation sequence (see FIG. 19), they can be collectively referred to as "middle left and right bells" because they are common in that similar benefits can be given.

That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is "middle left / right bell", seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation only when the stop operation order is "middle left / right". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is the "middle left / right bell", the stop operation order "middle left / right" is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In addition, the internal winning combination "middle right left cross-up bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "20"), "middle right left cross-up bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "21"). ”),“ Middle right / left cross-up bell 3 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 22 ”),“ middle right / left lower bell 1 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 32 ”), "Middle right left lower bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "33") and "middle right left lower bell 3" (small role / replay data pointer value is "34") are stop operations. Focusing on the order (see FIG. 19), it can be collectively referred to as "middle right / left bell" because it is common in that similar benefits can be given.

That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is "middle right / left bell", seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation only when the stop operation order is "middle right / left". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "middle right / left bell", the stop operation order "middle right / left" is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In addition, the internal winning combination "Right / Left Middle Middle Bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "23"), "Right / Left Middle Middle Bell 2" (Small role / replay data pointer value is "24") , "Right, left, middle, middle bell 3" (small role / replay data pointer value is "25"), "Right, left, middle, lower bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "35"), "Right, left, middle" "Lower bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "36") and "Right / Left middle lower bell 3" (small role / replay data pointer value is "37") are the stop operation order (Fig. Focusing on (see 19), it can be collectively referred to as "right, left, middle bell" because it is common in that similar benefits can be given.

That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is "right / left middle bell", seven medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation only when the stop operation order is "right / left middle". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is the "right / left middle bell", the stop operation order "right / left middle" is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In addition, the internal winning combination "right middle left middle bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "26"), "right middle left middle bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "27"). ”),“ Right middle left middle bell 3 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 27 ”),“ right middle left lower bell 1 ”(small role / replay data pointer value is“ 38 ”) , "Right middle left lower bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "39") and "right middle left lower bell 3" (small role / replay data pointer value is "40") Focusing on the stop operation order (see FIG. 19), it can be collectively referred to as "right middle left bell" because it is common in that similar benefits can be given.

That is, when the result of the internal lottery process is "right middle left bell", seven medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "right middle left". Is done. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "right middle left bell", the stop operation order "right middle left" is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In this way, the internal winning combination in which the player's profit fluctuates based on the third factor described above is called a so-called "pushing order role", and when it is a replay role, it is called a "pushing order replay". In the case of a small role, it may be called a "pushing order small role".

In the present embodiment, when the "pushing order small role" "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell" are determined as internal winning combinations during AT. In addition, the stop operation order in which seven medals will be paid out is notified.

<Composition of small roles in push order>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the configuration of the push order small combination in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a push order small combination in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the push order small combination in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the push order small combination when the configuration of is not applied.

In addition, in FIG. 20A, "middle left and right bell A" conceptually means "middle left and right cross-up bells 1 to 3" (small role / replay data pointer values are "17" to "19"). "Middle right left bell A" conceptually represents "middle right left cross-up bells 1 to 3" (small role / replay data pointer values are "20" to "22"), and "right left middle bell" "B" conceptually represents "right, left, middle, middle bells 1 to 3" (small role / replay data pointer values are "23" to "25"), and "right, middle, left bell B" is "right, middle, right". Left middle bells 1 to 3 "(small role / replay data pointer values are" 26 "to" 28 ") are conceptually represented, and" middle left and right bells C "are" middle left and right lower bells 1 to 3 "( The value of the data pointer for small role / replay is conceptually represented as "29" to "31"), and "middle right / left bell C" is "middle right / left lower bell 1-3" (data pointer for small role / replay). The values are conceptually represented by "32" to "34"), and "right and left middle bell C" is "right and left middle lower bells 1 to 3" (small role / replay data pointer values are "35" to "37". ") Is conceptually represented, and" right middle left bell C "concepts" right middle left lower bell 1 to 3 "(small role / replay data pointer values are" 38 "to" 40 "). It is a representation.

Further, in FIG. 20A, as shown in FIG. 19, "one unquestioned sheet" is "middle left and right lower bells 1 to 3" (small role / replay data pointer values are "29" to "31". ”),“ Middle right and left lower bells 1 to 3 ”(small role / replay data pointer values are“ 32 ”to“ 34 ”),“ Right and left middle lower bells 1 to 3 ”(small role / replay data pointer) "Middle 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-9" in "35" to "37") and "Right middle left lower bell 1 to 3" (small role / replay data pointer values are "38" to "40") And "Right 1st 2nd incorrect answer B1-6" are conceptually expressed. Similarly, "pushing order correct answer 7 sheets rising to the right", "pushing order correct answer middle 7 sheets", "pushing order correct answer lower 7 sheets", "pressing position correct answer upper 7 sheets", "pressing position correct answer 1 sheet" and The "first stop correct answer 1 sheet" is also a conceptual representation of the winning combination shown in FIG.

Further, in FIG. 20B, if the "right / left middle bell A" is defined as an internal winning combination, it conceptually represents the "right / left middle cross-up bells 1 to 3" and is a stop operation. Only when the order is "right, left, middle", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the "cross-up bells 1 to 9" is won and seven medals are paid out. In addition, "right middle left bell A" is a conceptual representation of "right middle left cross-up bells 1 to 3" if it is defined as an internal winning combination, and the stop operation order is "right middle left". Only in the case of "", regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of "Cross-up bells 1 to 9" is won and seven medals are paid out. Further, if "middle left and right bell B" is defined as an internal winning combination, it conceptually represents "middle left and right middle bells 1 to 3", and when the stop operation order is "middle left and right". This indicates that the "middle bell" will be won and seven medals will be paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. In addition, "middle right left bell B" is a conceptual representation of "middle right left middle bells 1 to 3" if it is defined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation order is "middle right left". This indicates that the "middle bell" will be won and seven medals will be paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

Further, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the "correct answer at the pressing position" means that the timing of the stop operation was appropriate, that is, "missing" occurred in the second element described above. It indicates that the stop operation was performed without doing so. For example, "pressing position correct answer upper 7 sheets" means that when the stop operation order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle", the stop operation timing is the winning of "upper bells 1 to 12" ( Only when it is time to display the symbols that make up the combination of symbols related to the "upper bell" (winning is permitted) on the effective line, the winning (winning is permitted) "upper bell" The combination of the symbols of "" is displayed on the valid line, indicating that seven medals are paid out.

Further, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, "(1/4)" or "(1/2)" means a symbol on at least one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. When a stop operation is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing in which one predetermined symbol is displayed on the one reel, another predetermined value that is not displayed depending on the predetermined stop operation timing. When there are symbols, it represents the number of those predetermined symbols (in other words, the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing).

For example, when "upper bells 1 to 12" are viewed as one group, in the reel 3L, the "replay" symbol is arranged so as to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and in the reel 3R. , "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B" and "Watermelon C" symbols (one symbol group) are arranged so as to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. On the other hand, in the reel 3C, "watermelon A" (corresponding to "upper bells 1 to 3"), "watermelon C (corresponding to" upper bells 4 to 6 ")," white blank "(" upper bells 7 to 9 "). (Corresponding to) and "Red 7" (corresponding to "upper bells 10 to 12") are the predetermined symbols described above, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation timing for displaying any of these symbols, the stop operation is performed. It is arranged so that other symbols are not displayed at the operation timing. That is, in the reel 3C, predetermined symbols are arranged so that the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing is four (see FIGS. 10, 14a and 14b).

Further, for example, when "middle 1st incorrect answer A1 to A4" and "middle 1st incorrect answer B1 to B4" are regarded as one group, the "bell" and "watermelon B" symbols (one symbol group) are used in the reel 3L. ) Is arranged to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and on the reel 3C, the "cherry" symbol is arranged to be displayed on the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. There is. On the other hand, in the reel 3R, "BAR" (corresponding to "middle 1st incorrect answer A1, A3"), "watermelon A" (corresponding to "middle 1st incorrect answer A2, A4"), "watermelon B" (corresponding to "middle 1st incorrect answer A2, A4") "Incorrect answer B1, B3") and "Red 7" (corresponding to "Middle 1st incorrect answer B2, B4") are the above-mentioned predetermined symbols, and stop at the stop operation timing to display one of these symbols. When an operation is performed, other symbols are not displayed at the stop operation timing. That is, in the reel 3R, predetermined symbols are arranged so that the number of choices when the player selects the stop operation timing is two (see FIGS. 10, 14a and 14b).

Here, comparing (a) and (b) of FIG. 20, the number of internal winning combinations is eight in (a) of FIG. 20, whereas in (b) of FIG. 20, the number of internal winning combinations is eight. The number of winning combinations is 12, and the number of internal winning combinations is to increase by four. Further, in FIG. 20A, when it is desired to set the total lottery value of the desired push order small winning combination to "4000" (that is, when it is desired to assign the lottery value of "1000" to the correct push order. ), Whereas the lottery value can be evenly assigned, whereas in (b) of FIG. 20, the desired lottery value described above cannot be evenly assigned.

As described above, according to the configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment, the number of internal winning combinations is not monotonous in the push order small combination (combination of displayed symbols). By reducing the amount, the amount of data can be reduced, the control burden of the internal lottery process can be reduced, and the desired lottery value can be easily assigned evenly, so that the lottery is fair and easy to design. It will also contribute to that.

Further, in FIG. 20A, the lottery values (for example, “250”) of “middle left / right bell C”, “middle right / left bell C”, “right / left middle bell C”, and “right middle / left bell C” are set. , "Middle left and right bell A", "Middle right left bell A", "Right left middle bell B" and "Right middle left bell B" instead of lowering the lottery value (for example, "750") When the "C", "Middle Right Left Bell C", "Right Left Middle Bell C" or "Right Middle Left Bell C" is won, even if the stop operation order is incorrect due to any of the stop operation orders, "missing" "Is not generated," one unquestioned "wins a prize, and one medal is paid out, whereas in (b) of FIG. 20, the stop operation order of the first stop operation is incorrect. As long as there is always a possibility of "missing".

As described above, according to the configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment, in the push order small combination in which the lottery value is relatively low, even if the stop operation order is incorrect, it is always possible. By giving the minimum profit to the player, as a result, the bias of the profit given to the player can be reduced, which also contributes to the fairness of the game.

Although the configuration of the push-order small combination according to the present embodiment has been described above with reference to FIG. 20, the configuration of the push-order small combination according to the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, in the configuration of the push order small combination according to the present embodiment, there is no case where the push order is correct when the stop operation order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle", but the push order is not provided. It may be possible to provide a case where the answer is correct.

In this case, "left middle right bell D" and "left and right middle bell D" are specified, and when the "left middle right bell D" is won, the stop operation is performed only when the stop operation order is "left middle right". Regardless of the timing, one of the "upper bells 1 to 12" will be won and 7 medals will be paid out, and when the "left and right middle bell D" is won, the stop operation order is "left and right middle". Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the "upper bells 1 to 12" may be won and seven medals may be paid out. Furthermore, "left middle right bell C" and "left and right middle bell C" are specified, and when the "left middle right bell C" is won, the timing of the stop operation is limited to the case where the stop operation order is "left middle right". Regardless of this, 7 medals will be paid out by winning one of the "Lower Bells 1-3", and when the "Left and Right Middle Bell C" is won, the stop operation order is "Left and Right Middle". As long as, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the "lower bells 1 to 3" may be won and seven medals may be paid out. In addition, "1 unquestioned sheet", "1 correct answer at the pressing position", and "1 correct answer for the first stop" may be configured in the same manner as described above.

In addition, for example, "7" medals are paid out when the push order is correct, and "1" medals are paid out when the push order is incorrect. However, when the push order is correct, the number of medals inserted (3) or more is required. It suffices if the number of medals equal to or less than the specified number (15) is paid out, and the number can be set as appropriate. Further, when the push order is incorrect, the number of medals that are one or more and less than the number of medals inserted (three) may be paid out, and the number of medals can be appropriately set. Further, when the push order is incorrect, the number of medals less than the number of medals paid out when the push order is correct may be paid out.

<Reel stop control>
The main CPU 51 executes the following processing in order to realize the above-mentioned reel stop control.

First, the main CPU 51 determines the internal winning combination in the internal lottery process (see S14 in FIG. 42) described later, and when the information regarding the internal winning combination is stored in the main RAM 53, the reel stop initial setting process described later (FIG. In (see S16 of 42), various stop control information stored in the main ROM 52 is read out and stored in the main RAM 53 based on the internal winning combination.

Here, exemplifying the information stored as various stop control information, in relation to the second element described above, at which symbol position when the stop button is operated on each reel, at which symbol position is stopped ( In relation to the information that directly or indirectly defines the number of sliding pieces) and the third element described above, when the stop button is operated in which stop operation order, which symbol combination is preferentially displayed. Information that directly or indirectly defines the information can be mentioned.

Next, the main CPU 51 stops each reel based on various stop control information stored in the main RAM 53 in the reel stop control process (see S22 in FIG. 42) described later. In particular, when the internal winning combination is the "pushing order combination", appropriate stop control information is selected from the stored stop control information according to the stop operation order, or 1 stop operation is performed. After that, stop control information is generated (changed) and stop control is performed.

Depending on the stop operation timing and the stop operation order, different stop control may be executed even if the internal winning combination is the same, but the stop control is uniquely determined in advance and is the same. The same stop control is executed as long as the internal winning combination and the same stop operation timing and stop operation order are used.

[Configuration of storage area allocated to main RAM]
Next, the configurations of various storage areas allocated to the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 28.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storage area shown in FIG. 21 is composed of 27 storage areas of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 27. The internal winning combination storage area is configured to be able to store data (bits) corresponding to the combination of each symbol specified in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, and as a result of the internal lottery processing, a prize is won. "1" is set in the data (bits) corresponding to the combination of the allowed symbols, and "0" is set in the data (bits) corresponding to the combination of the symbols not allowed to win.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 22 is composed of 27 storage areas of display combination storage areas 1 to 27. The display combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area described above, and among the combinations of symbols that are allowed to win as a result of the internal lottery processing, the symbols that can be displayed on the valid line. "1" is set in the data (bits) corresponding to the combination, and "0" is set in the data (bits) corresponding to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed. Further, the display combination storage area is updated every time each reel of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, based on the data (bits) stored in the symbol code storage area described later. , Even after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the combination of symbols in which "1" is set will be the winning combination. That is, the display combination storage area is used by the main CPU 51 to identify the winning combination after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 23 is composed of 27 storage areas of symbol code storage areas 1 to 27. The symbol code storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area described above, and is valid among the combinations of the symbols specified in the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14. "1" is set for the data (bits) according to the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the line, and "0" is set for the data (bits) according to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed. It is set. Further, the data (bits) of the symbol code storage area is updated every time the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

<Carryover storage area>
The carry-over combination storage area shown in FIG. 24 stores data related to the carry-over combination. For example, when the BB carry-over state is reached (that is, when "BB" is determined as the internal winning combination), bit 0 of the carry-over combination storage area is set to "1", and "BB" is won to win the BB. When shifting to the gaming state, the corresponding bit is reset to "0".

<Game status flag storage area>
The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 25 stores data related to the BB game state, the RB game state, and the RT game state. For example, when the BB game state is entered, bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is set to "1", and bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is set to "1".

Further, when the RT game state becomes the RT1 game state, bit 2 of the game state flag storage area is set to "1", and when the RT game state becomes the RT0 game state, the game state flag storage area Bit 2 is reset to "0".

In the following description, bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is also referred to as "BB game state flag", bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is also referred to as "RB game state flag", and bits of the game state flag storage area. 2 is also referred to as "RT1 game status flag".

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 26 stores the states of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. Bit 0 corresponds to the stop button 17L, and when the stop button 17L is operated, "1" is stored in bit 0.

Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the stop button 17C, and when the stop button 17C is operated, "1" is stored in bit 1. Further, the bit 2 corresponds to the stop button 17R, and when the stop button 17R is operated, "1" is stored in the bit 2.

Bit 4 corresponds to the stop button 17L, and when the stop button 17L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the stop button 17C, and when the stop button 17C is valid, "1" is stored in bit 5. Further, the bit 6 corresponds to the stop button 17R, and when the stop button 17R is valid, "1" is stored in the bit 6.

In the present embodiment, the effective stop button refers to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of detecting the stop operation by the main CPU 51.

<Press order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 27 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order "left → middle → right", and when the pressing order is "left → middle → right", "1" is stored in bit 0, and the other bits are set to "0". It will be reset.

Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the pressing order of "left → right → middle", bit 2 corresponds to the pressing order of "middle → left → right", and bit 3 corresponds to the pressing order of "middle → right → left". The pressing order of bit 4 corresponds to "right-> left-> middle", and the pressing order of bit 5 corresponds to "right-> middle-> left".

<Production game state storage area>
The effect game state storage area shown in FIG. 28 is an area for storing the effect game state managed by the main control side (that is, the main CPU 51). Bit 0 corresponds to the effect game state "main CZ state 1", and "1" is stored in bit 0 when the effect game state is "main CZ state 1".

Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the effect game state "main CZ state 2", bit 2 corresponds to the effect game state "pseudo probability change state 1", and bit 3 corresponds to the effect game state "pseudo probability change state 2". Corresponds to, and bit 4 corresponds to the effect game state "AT in progress state". Further, when all the bits are "0", the effect gaming state corresponds to the "normal gaming state". The details of each production game state will be described later.

[Structure of various lottery tables used for production, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 37, the configurations of various lottery tables used for the production and the like will be described.

<Reel action lottery table for main CZ state>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a reel action lottery table for the main CZ state stored in the main ROM 52. This reel action lottery table for the main CZ state is referred to in the lottery process during the normal game described later in the description of FIG. 48, and when the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2", each It is used to determine the reel action, which is an effect according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the reel action lottery table for the main CZ state, whether the effect game state is "main CZ state 1" or "main CZ state 2" (type of main CZ state) and the main CZ state One of the reel actions 1 to 8 is determined based on the value of the CZ game number counter indicating the number of games staying in the game and which internal winning combination is determined. The lottery value is assigned so as to.

For example, when the production game state is "main CZ state 1", the value of the CZ game number counter is "1", and the internal winning combination is "replay", the reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 32768/65536. The reel action 3 is determined with a probability of 8192/65536, the reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 23808/65536, the reel action 5 is determined with a probability of 256/6536, and the reel action 6 is determined with a probability of 256/6536. Is determined, and reel action 8 is determined with a probability of 256/65536.

Further, for example, when the production game state is "main CZ state 1", the value of the CZ game number counter is "8", and the internal winning combination is "replay", the reel action 2 has a probability of 64512/65536. Is determined, reel action 5 is determined with a probability of 512/65536, and reel action 6 is determined with a probability of 512/65536.

Further, for example, when the production game state is "main CZ state 2", the value of the CZ game number counter is "1 to 7" or "8", and the internal winning combination is "replay", 52428/65536. The reel action 2 is determined with the probability of, the reel action 5 is determined with the probability of 6554/65536, and the reel action 6 is determined with the probability of 6554/65536.

Further, for example, the reel action 1 is a symbol variation mode in which each reel rotates in the reverse direction by one step and then starts the forward rotation (normal rotation), and the reel action 2 is a pattern variation mode in which each reel rotates in the reverse direction in two steps and then forwards. It is a symbol variation mode that starts rotation (normal rotation), reel action 3 is a symbol variation mode that starts forward rotation (normal rotation) after each reel rotates in three steps in reverse, and reel action 4 is each. This is a symbol variation mode in which the reels rotate in the reverse direction in four steps and then start the forward rotation (normal rotation). In the reel actions 5 and 7, the reels rotate in the reverse direction in five steps and then start the forward rotation (normal rotation). It is a symbol variation mode, and the reel actions 6 and 8 can be assumed to be a symbol variation mode in which each reel rotates in the reverse direction in 6 steps and then starts the forward rotation (normal rotation). It should be noted that the reel actions 5 and 6 are different from each other in that the unit game is directed by the symbol variation mode, whereas the reel actions 7 and 8 are different in that the next unit game is directed by the symbol variation mode. It has become.

Further, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 51, when the reel action 3 or 4 is executed when the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1", the effect game state is changed to the "main CZ state" from the next unit game. The reel actions 5 to 8 are executed when the mode shifts to the "state 2" and the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" as described later in the description of FIG. 74. And, the AT game is configured to start from the next unit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the main CZ state, one reel action is determined and executed among a plurality of reel actions having different reverse rotation stages, so that the reel action is performed. It is possible to gradually improve the player's expectation when it is executed, and since the degree of advantage is synchronized with the number of stages in which the reverse rotation is performed, it is advantageous for the player. The degree can be grasped intuitively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the value of the CZ game number counter is higher than that in the case where the effect game state is "main CZ state 1" and the value of the CZ game number counter is "1 to 7". When is "8", the probability that the AT game is started (the probability that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is determined) is relatively high. That is, since the number of continuous games in the CZ state is 8 (see FIG. 51), in the main CZ state, the final game is configured to be most advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the probability that the AT game is started (reel) is higher when the directing game state is the "main CZ state 2" than when the directing game state is the "main CZ state 1". The probability that any of actions 5 to 8 is determined) is relatively high. That is, in the main CZ state, the case where the effect game state is the "main CZ state 2" is more advantageous to the player than the case where the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1". Has been done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reel action 3 or 4 is executed in the main CZ state, the effect game state is shifted from the “main CZ state 1” to the “main CZ state 2”, and the “main CZ state 2” is executed. In "CZ state 2", the probability that the AT game is started (the probability that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is determined) is configured to be relatively high, so that the mode of the reel action is diversified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game and prevent the expectation in the main CZ state from being lowered even when the reel action (reel actions 5 to 8) at which the AT game is started is not determined. Can be done.

In FIGS. 29 to 37, the internal winning combination "replay" refers to "normal rips 1 to 4" and "bell rips 1 to 4", and the internal winning combination "bell" refers to "middle left and right cross-up bell 1". ~ 3 "," Middle Right Left Cross-up Bell 1-3 "," Right Left Middle Middle Bell 1-3 "," Right Middle Left Middle Bell 1-3 "," Middle Left Left Lower Bell 1-3 "," Middle Right Left Lower Refers to "bells 1 to 3", "right middle left middle lower bells 1 to 3" and "right middle left lower bells 1 to 3", and the internal winning role "chance role" is "chance lip 1", "chance lip 2" and The internal winning role "watermelon" refers to "watermelon", the internal winning role "weak cherry" refers to "weak cherry", and the internal winning role "strong cherry" refers to "strong cherry". 1 ”and“ strong cherry 2 ”are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the reel action lottery is performed for all or part of the internal winning combinations shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. May be good.

<Pseudo game count lottery table>
FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a pseudo-game count lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This pseudo-game count lottery table is referred to in the pseudo-probability change state lottery process described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the effect game state is "pseudo-probability change state 1" or "pseudo-probability change state 2", the pseudo-game count is Is used to determine.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the pseudo-game count lottery table is based on whether the effect game state is "pseudo-probability change state 1" or "pseudo-probability change state 2" (type of pseudo-probability change state). , The lottery value is assigned so that any one of 0 to 10 pseudo-games is determined.

For example, when the effect game state is "pseudo-probability change state 1", the number of pseudo-games is determined to be 0 with a probability of 164/256, and the number of pseudo-games is determined to be 1 with a probability of 40/256. The number of pseudo games is determined twice with a probability, the number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 6/256, and the number of pseudo games is determined with a probability of 6/256.

Further, for example, when the effect game state is the "pseudo probability variation state 2", the number of pseudo games is determined to be 0 with a probability of 32/256, and the number of pseudo games is determined to be 2 times with a probability of 64/256. With a probability of 256, the number of pseudo games is determined 3 times, with a probability of 64/256, 4 times of pseudo games are determined, with a probability of 16/256, 5 times of pseudo games are determined, and with a probability of 16/256, pseudo games are determined. The number of games is determined to be 10.

When the number of pseudo games is determined to be one or more, the pseudo internal winning combination is determined and the number of ATs is added (added) based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination, as will be described later in FIG. 74. Will be done.

Here, as shown in FIG. 30, the probability that the number of pseudo games is given is higher when the effect game state is the "pseudo probability change state 2" than when the effect game state is the "pseudo probability change state 1". Is relatively high. That is, in the pseudo-probability change state, the case where the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability change state 2" is more advantageous to the player than the case where the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability change state 1". Has been done.

<Pseudo internal winning role lottery table>
FIG. 30B is a diagram showing a pseudo-internal winning combination lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This pseudo-internal winning combination lottery table is referred to in the pseudo-probability change state lottery process described later in the description of FIG. 47 and in the game start lock execution process described later in the description of FIG. 49, and the effect game state is "pseudo-probability change state 1 "Or" pseudo probability change state 2 ", and when the number of pseudo games is 1 or more, it is used to determine the pseudo internal winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 30B, in the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table, a weak cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 128/256, and a strong cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 64/256. The lottery value is assigned so that the watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 32/256 and a chance combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination with a probability of 32/256.

In the pseudo-game executed during the lock at the start of the game, the pseudo-internal winning combination is pseudo-reel 3L, based on the player's operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R (pseudo-stop operation). It is used to stop the 3C and 3R. For example, when a weak cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the "cherry" symbol is pseudo-stopped on the lower stage of the left reel 3L, the lower stage of the middle reel 3C, and the upper stage of the right reel 3R. Then, when a strong cherry is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, the "cherry" symbol is pseudo-stopped on the lower stage of the left reel 3L, the lower stage of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. Then, when the watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and the player performs a pseudo stop operation, the "watermelon" symbol is pseudo-stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. , When the chance combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and the player performs a pseudo stop operation, the "replay" symbol is pseudo-stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage of the right reel 3R. The "cherry" symbol is controlled to stop in a pseudo manner. From this, it can be said that the pseudo-internal winning combination is a reel action.

<High accuracy transition lottery table>
FIG. 30 (c) is a diagram showing a high-probability transition lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This high-probability transition lottery table is referred to in the lottery process during the pseudo-probability change state described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the effect gaming state is the "pseudo-probability change state 1", whether to shift to the "pseudo-probability change state 2" Used to determine whether or not.

As shown in FIG. 30 (c), the high-probability transition lottery table does not shift to the status quo (that is, "pseudo-probability change state 2" with a probability of 255/256 when the internal winning combination is "replay". ) Is determined, a high probability transition (that is, transition to "pseudo probability variation state 2") is determined with a probability of 1/256, and a probability of 256/256 when the internal winning combination is "watermelon". The lottery value is assigned so that the high probability transition (that is, the transition to the "pseudo-probability change state 2") is determined with (that is, 100% probability).

<Highly secured obstacle game number lottery table>
FIG. 30D is a diagram showing a high-securing obstacle game number lottery table stored in the main ROM 52. This high-securing obstacle game number lottery table is referred to in the lottery process during the pseudo-probability change state described later in the description of FIG. 47, and when the effect game state shifts to the "pseudo-probability change state 2", the "pseudo-probability change state 2" It is used to determine the number of unit games in which a pseudo game can be performed (that is, the number of times the lock is executed during the "pseudo probability change state 2" in the game start lock execution process described later in the description of FIG. 49). Be done.

As shown in FIG. 30 (d), in the lottery table for the number of high-secured obstacle games, the number of high-secured obstacle games is determined to be 3 times with a probability of 164/256, and the number of high-secured obstacle games is determined to be 4 times with a probability of 60/256. Is determined, the number of high-secured obstacle games is determined 5 times with a probability of 24/256, and the lottery value is assigned so that the number of high-secured obstacle games 10 times is determined with a probability of 8/256.

<Pseudo probability change state end lottery table>
FIG. 30 (e) is a diagram showing a pseudo-probability change state end lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. This pseudo-probability state end lottery table is referred to in the pseudo-probability change state processing described later in the description of FIG. 71, and is a "pseudo-probability change state 1" managed by the sub CPU 81 when the effect game state is "pseudo-probability change state 1". It is used to determine whether or not to terminate the pseudo-probability state when the value of the pseudo-probability state management counter, which is the number of guaranteed games of "probability state 1", is "0".

As shown in FIG. 30 (e), the pseudo-probability change state end lottery table ends the probability change end (that is, "pseudo-probability change state 1" with a probability of 8192/32768 when the internal winning combination is "replay". That) is determined, and the probability of continuation of probability change (that is, not ending "pseudo-probability change state 1") is determined with a probability of 24576/32768, and the probability of 24576/32768 when the internal winning combination is "bell". Is determined to end the probability change (that is, to end the "pseudo-probability state 1"), and the probability of continuation of the probability change (that is, not to end the "pseudo-probability state 1") is determined with a probability of 8192/32768. A value has been assigned.

As will be described later in the description of FIG. 52, the "pseudo-probability change state 1" is actually terminated based on winning the "Bell Lip", but in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 is used. When the above-mentioned probability change end is determined, when either "normal lip 1 to 4" or "bell lip 1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation order in which "bell lip" becomes the winning combination ( (See FIG. 19) is notified to win a prize in the "bell lip" and end the "pseudo probability change state 1". On the other hand, if the value of the pseudo probability change state management counter is not "0", or if the sub CPU 81 determines the above-mentioned probability change continuation, either "normal rips 1 to 4" or "bell rips 1 to 4" is the internal winning combination. By notifying the stop operation order (see FIG. 19) in which "Belllip" does not win the prize, the "Belllip" is not won and the "pseudo-probability change state 1" is continued. There is.

However, the end and continuation of the "pseudo-probability change state 1" may be managed by the main CPU 51 in the same manner as in the "pseudo-probability change state 2". Specifically, the main CPU 51 manages the pseudo probability change state management counter, and based on the value of the pseudo probability change state management counter becoming "0", the effect game state is changed from "pseudo probability change state 1" to "AT". It may be decided to shift to the "state".

<Reel action lottery table for fixed role>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a reel action lottery table for a fixed combination stored in the main ROM 52. This fixed winning reel action lottery table is referred to in the normal game lottery processing described later in the description of FIG. 48, and is displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R when the internal winning combination is a “fixed winning combination”. It is used to determine a special reel action that is an effect of a symbol variation mode. The "fixed combination" means a combination in which the start of the AT game is confirmed, and in the present embodiment, "cherry lip", "strong cherry lip", and "strong bell" (see FIG. 17). ) Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 31, in the reel action lottery table for fixed combination, any special reel action of special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined based on which fixed combination the internal winning combination is. A lottery value is assigned.

When the internal winning combination is "cherry lip", the special reel action 1 is determined with a probability of 128/256, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 43/256, and the special reel action 3 is determined with a probability of 42/256. Is determined, and the special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 43/256.

In addition, when the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip", the special reel action 1 is not determined, the special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 85/256, and the special reel action 3 is determined with a probability of 86/256. Then, the special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 85/256.

Also, when the internal winning combination is "strong bell", special reel actions 1 and 3 are not determined, special reel action 2 is determined with a probability of 128/256, and special reel action 4 is determined with a probability of 128/256. It is determined.

Further, for example, the special reel action 1 is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C rotate in the reverse order, and the right reel 3R starts the forward rotation (normal rotation) without the reverse rotation. The reel action 2 is a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R rotate in the reverse order, and then the forward rotation (normal rotation) is started. The special reel action 3 is the left reel 3L. , Middle reel 3C, right reel 3R, reverse rotation in this order, and then all reels are aligned and reverse rotation once, and then forward rotation (normal rotation) is started. The special reel action 4 is a special reel action 4. It shall be a symbol variation mode in which the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are rotated in the reverse order, and then all the reels are aligned and the reels are rotated twice in the reverse direction, and then the forward rotation (normal rotation) is started. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, and as will be described later in the description of FIG. 74, when the special reel action 1 is determined, the addition fails and the number of ATs (value of the difference number counter for AT management) is not added. If the special reel actions 2 to 4 are determined, the addition is successful, and the number of ATs according to the type of the special reel action is added. Specifically, when the special reel action 2 is determined, "300" is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter, and when the special reel action 3 is determined, the AT management difference number counter is added. When "400" is added to the value of the counter and the special reel action 4 is determined, "500" is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter.

In the present embodiment, the "cherry" symbol is displayed on the left reel 3L regardless of whether the internal winning combination is "cherry lip" or the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip". When the stop button 17L is operated at the stop operation timing, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the stop control for winning the "cherry lip A" is performed. On the other hand, regarding the right reel 3R, the stop control is configured to be different depending on whether the internal winning combination is "cherry lip" or the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip".

Specifically, for example, when the "BAR" symbol is pressed on each reel and the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip", if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop operation timing, Stop display of each reel at the position of the symbol position data "12" in the middle of the left reel 3L, the position of the symbol position data "10" in the middle of the middle reel 3C, and the position of the symbol position data "13" in the middle of the right reel 3R. However, if the internal winning combination is "cherry lip", the symbol position data is in the middle of the left reel 3L even if the stop operation is performed at the appropriate stop operation timing. Although it is possible to display the stop display at the position of "12" and the position of the symbol position data "10" in the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, the stop display is displayed at the position of the symbol position data "13" in the middle stage of the right reel 3R. Is configured so that it cannot be done.

Here, when the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip", as described above, the special reel actions 2 to 4 are always determined, so that the additional success is confirmed, whereas the internal winning combination is "strong cherry lip". In the case of "cherry lip", as mentioned above, since the special reel action 1 may be decided, there is a 1/2 probability of success or failure of the addition, so the internal winning role is "cherry lip". Whether it is a "strong cherry lip" or a "cherry lip" is an event of great interest to the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "BAR" symbol is pressed at least on each reel, the internal winning combination is "strong cherry" by changing the stopping mode of the symbol displayed on each reel. Whether it was a "rip" or a "cherry lip" is configured to be recognizable before the special reel action is performed. With this configuration, the player who wants to quickly recognize the type of fixed combination recognizes the type before the special reel action is executed by pressing the "BAR" symbol on each reel. You will be able to do it. On the other hand, a player who wants to recognize whether or not the special reel action will be added successfully can play the game with a longer sense of expectation by not performing the above-mentioned push. That is, since it is possible to notify whether or not the addition is successful depending on the notification form and timing desired by the player, it is possible to perform notification according to the player's preference regarding the addition notification.

<Mode suggestion production lottery table>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a mode suggestion effect lottery table stored in the sub ROM 82. This mode suggestion effect lottery table is referred to in the normal in-game process described later in the description of FIG. 72, and is used to determine the mode suggestion effect for suggesting the determined mode in the first game after the end of the AT game. Used for.

As shown in FIG. 32, the mode suggestion effect lottery table has a lottery value such that one of the mode suggestion effects 1 to 9 is determined based on which mode the current mode is. Assigned.

When the current mode is "mode A", the mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 6552/32768, the mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 3 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768. Is determined, the mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768.

Further, when the current mode is "mode B", the mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 7476/32768, the mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 6554/32768, and the mode suggestion effect is determined with a probability of 6554/32768. The effect 3 is determined, the mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, the mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 3276/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 3276/32768. The mode suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, and the mode suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 512/32768.

Further, when the current mode is "mode C", the mode suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 9728/32768, the mode suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 8192/32768, and the mode suggestion effect is determined with a probability of 4096/32768. The effect 3 is determined, the mode suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, the mode suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768. The mode suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, the mode suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 1024/32768, and the mode suggestion effect 9 is determined with a probability of 512/32768.

Here, the mode is used to determine the number of next ceiling games, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 73. Mode A is the most disadvantageous mode for the player, and the probability that 1000 games are selected as the number of ceiling games is higher than that of mode B. Further, the mode B is a mode more advantageous than the mode A, and the probability that 240 games are selected as the number of ceiling games is higher than that of the mode A. Further, mode C is the most advantageous mode for the player, and the number of ceiling games is always selected within 100 games.

That is, when the mode suggestion effects 6 to 8 are determined, it is determined that the current mode is mode B or mode C, and when the mode suggestion effects 9 are determined, the current mode is determined. Is determined to be mode C, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

Further, since the mode suggestion effect is performed in the first game after the end of the AT game, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the motivation for the game due to the end of the AT game.

<Lottery table suggesting the number of remaining games>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a lottery table for suggesting the number of remaining games stored in the sub ROM 82. The remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table is referred to in the normal game in-process described later in the description of FIG. 72, and the number of remaining games until the AT game is started (that is, the ceiling game) for every 10 games in the normal game. The number of games remaining to suggest the number of games up to the number) Used to determine the suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 33, the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table has any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 1 to 10 based on the range of the current remaining game number suggestion effect. Lottery values are assigned to be determined.

For example, when the current number of remaining games is "11 to 30", the remaining game number suggestion effect 1 is determined with a probability of 568/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 3 is determined with a probability of 100/32768. The remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, 2000 / The remaining game number suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 9 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, and 9300/32768 The number of remaining games suggestion effect 10 is determined with a probability.

Further, for example, when the current number of remaining games is "31 to 50", the remaining game number suggestion effect 2 is determined with a probability of 568/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 3 is determined with a probability of 100/32768. Then, the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. The remaining game number suggestion effect 7 is determined with a probability of 100/32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 8 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, and the remaining game number suggestion effect 9 is determined with a probability of 9300/32768, 9300 / With a probability of 32768, the remaining game number suggestion effect 10 is determined.

Here, as shown in FIG. 33, when the remaining game number suggestion effect 1 is determined and executed, the number of remaining games is "1 to 10" games or "11 to 30" games (that is, the remaining 30 games). When it is confirmed that the number of remaining games is within the game, and the number of remaining games suggestion effect 2 is determined and executed, the number of remaining games is "31 to 50", "51 to 100", or "101 to 240" ( That is, when it is determined that the number of remaining games is 31 games or more and 240 games or less), and the remaining game number suggestion effect 3 is determined and executed, the remaining game numbers are "1 to 10" and "11 to 30". , "31-50", "51-100" or "101-240" (that is, within the remaining 240 games), so that when the remaining game number suggestion effects 1 to 3 are executed, The player can directly recognize that the number of remaining games is small (that is, the start of the next AT game is near). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33, when any one of the remaining game number suggestion effects 8 to 10 is determined and executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the amount of the remaining game number.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the probability that a specific remaining game number suggestion effect is executed in a certain remaining game number range is set to a specific remaining game number suggestion effect in another remaining game number range. While the number of remaining games is decreasing by making it higher or lower than the probability that is executed, the player is given multiple specific remaining game number suggestion effects. It is decided to add a new playability to estimate the number of remaining games.

A specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of estimating the number of remaining games by suggesting the number of remaining games in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

For example, the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is executed with a probability of 2000/32768 when the current remaining game number is in the range of "31-50" or "101-240", and the current remaining game number is ". When it is in the range of "241", it is executed with a probability of 300/32768, and when it is in the range of other remaining games, it is executed with a probability of 100/32768. Therefore, the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 When executed, it can be inferred that the number of remaining games is likely to be in the range of "31-50" or "101-240", but on the other hand, it may be in the range of "241-". Can be guessed.

In this case, if none of the remaining game number suggestion effects 4 to 7 is executed when the remaining game number suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times thereafter, the number of remaining games may still be in the range of "241". Can be inferred to be high. On the other hand, when any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 4 to 7 is executed, as shown in FIG. 34, the range of the remaining game number is narrowed down according to the type of the executed remaining game number suggestion effect. It becomes possible to guess. When any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 1 to 3 is executed, it can be definitively recognized that the number of remaining games is small, as described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the normal game, every time 10 games are played, the remaining game number suggestion effect is executed, so that the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to the AT game is determined. It is possible to add a new playability of guessing. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and reduce the decrease in the operation of the game machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of games in the normal game increases, the effect of suggesting the number of remaining games is executed. Therefore, the player with a large number of games has more accurate remaining games. It is possible to promote the operation of the game machine because it is possible to grasp the above.

Further, in the present embodiment, in estimating the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to the AT game, there are cases where it can be estimated by executing the one-time remaining game number suggestion effect, or a plurality of remaining games. Since it may be possible to guess by executing the number suggestion effect, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the remaining game number suggestion effect itself.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the determination of the remaining game number suggestion effect is made with the lottery probability as described above, it is monotonous in estimating the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to the AT game. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming more diverse and make the game more diverse.

It is desirable that the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effects 4 to 7 be at least some relationship with each other. For example, the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is the effect data displayed as "close?", And the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is displayed as "should be close ...". The effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 6 is the effect data displayed as "It should be soon!", And the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 7 is "nearby". It can be assumed that the effect data is displayed as "!".

Further, for example, the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 4 is the effect data displayed as "Where is the character A?", And the effect data related to the remaining game number suggestion effect 5 is "place a or place". The effect data is displayed as "You should be in b!", And the effect data related to the effect 6 suggesting the number of remaining games is the effect data displaying "Let's find the place a!", Suggesting the number of remaining games. The effect data related to the effect 7 can be the effect data displayed as "Let's find the place b!".

<Point addition lottery table during AT>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a point addition lottery table during AT stored in the sub ROM 82. This AT point addition lottery table is referred to in the start command reception processing described later in the description of FIG. 69, and when any one of "Bell Lips 1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the AT game, It is used to determine whether or not to accumulate points during AT.

As shown in FIG. 35, the AT point addition lottery table is determined to be either maintained (non-winning) or added (winning) based on the current point value (that is, the value of the current AT point counter). The lottery value is assigned so that it is done.

When the current point value is "0", the maintenance (non-winning) is determined with the probability of 26214/32768, and the addition (winning) is determined with the probability of 6554/32768. Further, when the current point value is "1", the maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 27646/32768, and the addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 5120/32768.

Further, when the current point value is "2", the maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 28672/32768, and the addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 4096/32768. Further, when the current point value is "3", the maintenance (non-winning) is determined with a probability of 28672/32768, and the addition (winning) is determined with a probability of 4096/32768.

<Lottery table for adding AT times during addition>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a lottery table for adding the number of ATs in the additional state stored in the sub ROM 82. The lottery table for adding the number of ATs in the added state is referred to in the process in the added state described later in the description of FIG. 70, and when the value of the point counter in the added state described later becomes "100" or more during the added state. , It is used to determine the AT count addition value, which is the value added to the AT management difference number counter.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the AT count addition lottery table in the additional state, the AT count addition value is determined based on the additional state management counter value indicating the number of games staying in the additional state. The lottery value is assigned to. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the AT number addition lottery from becoming monotonous in the addition state, and to maintain the interest of the game even when the addition state is repeatedly controlled.

For example, when the additional state management counter value is "9" (excluding the time when the additional state is introduced, the first game of the additional state), there is a probability of 29492/32768 as the AT count addition value for the difference of 50 sheets (AT management difference). (Adding "50" to the number counter) is determined, and the difference number of 100 sheets (adding "100" to the AT management difference number counter) is determined as the AT number addition value with a probability of 3276/32768.

Further, for example, when the addition state management counter value is "5" (excluding the time when the addition state is introduced, the fifth game of the addition state), there is a probability of 20276/32768 as the AT count addition value for the difference of 20 sheets (AT management). (Adding "20" to the difference number counter for AT management) is determined, and 30 difference sheets (adding "30" to the difference number counter for AT management) is determined as the AT number addition value with a probability of 8192/32768. , The difference number of 50 sheets (adding "50" to the difference number counter for AT management) is determined as the AT number addition value with the probability of 3276/32768, and the difference number 100 as the AT number addition value with the probability of 1024/32768. The number of sheets (adding "100" to the AT management difference number counter) is determined.

Further, for example, when the additional state management counter value is "0" (excluding the time when the additional state is introduced, the 10th game of the additional state), there is a probability of 24166/32768 as the AT count addition value for the difference of 30 sheets (AT management). (Adding "30" to the difference number counter for AT management) is determined, and 50 difference sheets (adding "50" to the difference number counter for AT management) is determined as the AT number addition value with a probability of 6554/32768. , 2048/32768, the difference number of 100 sheets (adding "100" to the AT management difference number counter) is determined as the AT number addition value.

In this embodiment, the difference number management is adopted as the method of managing the number of ATs. Here, the difference number management means that when a medal is paid out by winning one of the small wins in the unit game, the medal inserted in the unit game is based on the number of medals paid out (for example, 7). The value (for example, 7-3 = 4) obtained by reducing the number of input sheets (for example, 3 sheets), which is the number of sheets of, is subtracted from the difference number counter (for example, the difference number counter for AT management), and the difference is obtained. The AT game is terminated when the value of the number counter becomes 0 or less.

However, in the present embodiment, the AT management method is not limited to the above-mentioned difference number management, and for example, a game number management method for managing the number of games in which AT games are played, and a push order role are used. One of the methods of managing the number of notifications that manages the number of notifications, the method of managing the number of sets that manages a predetermined number of games as one set, the method of managing the continuation rate that manages the continuation rate of AT games, or those. Combinations can also be adopted. That is, in the case of "addition" of "AT number of times", in addition to adding the difference number to the difference number counter, the number of games in which the AT game is played is added, and the number of times the push order combination is notified is added. It shall include either adding the number of sets, resetting the continuation rate, setting the continuation rate high, or a combination thereof.

<Point addition lottery table in the additional state>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a point addition lottery table in the additional state stored in the sub ROM 82. This point addition lottery table in the added state is referred to in the process in the added state described later in the description of FIG. 70, and determines the point addition value which is a value to be added to each game in the added state and the point counter in the added state. Used for In the point counter in the added state, the point addition value is cumulatively added during the added state, and when the value of the point counter in the added state becomes "100" or more, the above-mentioned number of ATs is added and the added state is added again. Can be done (continued) from the beginning.

As shown in FIG. 37, the point addition lottery table in the additional state is drawn so that any of the point addition values 1 to 100 is determined based on which internal winning combination is determined. A value has been assigned.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "replay", one of the point addition values 1 to 5 is determined with a probability of 2048/32768, and any of the point addition values 6 to 10 is determined with a probability of 1024/32768. , 819/32768 is the probability that any of the point addition values 11 to 15 is determined, 163/32768 is the probability that any of the point addition values 16 to 20 is determined, and 81/32768 is the probability that the point addition values 21 to 21 are determined. One of 32 is determined, one of the point addition values 34 to 36 is determined with a probability of 8/32768, and any of the point addition values 72 to 76 is determined with a probability of 2/32768, of 1/32768. One of the point addition values 78 to 100 is determined with a probability. Although the description of the point addition values 37 to 72 is omitted, it is assumed that any lottery value including 0 is assigned.

Further, as the addition state, a first addition state and a second addition state are further provided, and in the first addition state, the point addition value is drawn using the point addition lottery table in the addition state shown in FIG. 37, and the second addition state is performed. In the additional state, the point addition value may be drawn using the point addition lottery table in the additional state in which the lottery values are different. In this case, the point addition lottery table in the addition state used in the second addition state allocates the lottery value so that the point addition value given is relatively higher than the point addition lottery table in the addition state shown in FIG. 37. At the same time, in the point addition lottery table in the additional state shown in FIG. 37, a lottery value of "1" or more may be assigned to the point addition values 33 and 77 to which the lottery value "0" is assigned. With this configuration, the type of additional state can be notified by determining a predetermined point addition value.

[Structure of various data used for reel production control]
Next, the configurations of various data used for the reel effect control will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40.

<Data for reel production selection>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of reel effect selection data stored in the main ROM 52. This reel effect selection data is data used in the reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG. 59 to control the effect according to the determined reel action according to the symbol variation mode.

As shown in FIG. 38, the reel effect selection data is associated with the number of effects and the selection data for excitation output, or the effect phase end data for each effect target reel.

The number of effects is data that defines the number of times the excitation output control is executed based on the associated effect excitation output table or symbol position adjustment data. For example, when "32" is associated with the number of effects and "reverse rotation excitation output table" is associated with the effect excitation output table, the end code starts from the start address of the "reverse rotation excitation output table" (see FIG. 39). It stipulates that the excitation output control up to is performed once and is executed 32 times.

Further, the excitation output selection data is data for selecting the type of the effect excitation output table or the type of the symbol position adjustment data. Actually, in the excitation output selection data, a data address indicating the location of the effect excitation output table or a data address indicating the location of the symbol position adjustment data is stored, and the effect excitation is based on the data address. The output table or the symbol position adjustment data will be read out, but for convenience, in FIG. 38, each table or data is directly stored.

Further, the effect phase end data is data for identifying the end of the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode) in the effect target reel. For example, when the reel effect selection data is "1" and the effect target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), when the excitation main control by the hold excitation output table is executed 10 times, the left reel 3L When the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode) ends, but the reel effect selection data is "2" and the effect target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), the excitation output table for acceleration rotation After executing the excitation output control by the symbol position adjustment data 2 once, and further executing the excitation output control by the symbol position adjustment data 2 84 times, the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode) for the left reel 3L is controlled to end. Reel.

In this way, by storing the number of effects, the selection data for excitation output, and the end data of the effect phase individually for each reel (reel 3L, 3C, 3R) to be produced, various reel effects (effects according to the symbol variation mode) are stored. ) Can be executed.

<Excitation output table for production>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an effect excitation output table stored in the main ROM 52. Each of the effect excitation output tables is based on the excitation output selection data in the reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG. 59 or the result of the reel effect adjustment output process described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61. It is used to output excitation data to a stepping motor.

As shown in FIG. 39, the effect excitation output table is associated with the excitation direction data, the effect excitation timer, or the end code.

The exciting direction data is data that defines the rotation direction of the reel (that is, the output order of the pulses to the exciting phase in each stepping motor). For example, when the exciting phase of the stepping motor is A to D phase (4 phases), the exciting direction data "forward rotation" is in the order of AB phase, BC phase, CD phase, and DA phase. By outputting the excitation data with, the reel is controlled to rotate forward (from the player's point of view, it rotates from top to bottom), and the excitation direction data "reverse rotation" is the AD phase. By outputting excitation data in the order of DC phase, CB phase, and BA phase, the reel is controlled to rotate in the reverse direction (from the player's point of view, it rotates from bottom to top). It is data, and the excitation direction data "hold" is controlled so as to hold the state in which the reel is stopped by exciting all the phases A to D or not exciting any of the phases A to D. It is data.

Further, the effect excitation timer defines the value of the timer that is decremented one by one in the timer update process (see S322 in FIG. 55) described later, and the end code is the excitation data of the excitation output table. This is data for identifying the end of output.

That is, for example, when the "reverse rotation excitation output table" is set as the effect excitation output table, first, the excitation data for rotating the reel in the reverse direction is output for the number of interrupts twice, and then further. The control is terminated by outputting the excitation data for rotating the reel in the reverse direction for the number of interrupts twice.

<Production symbol position search data>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of effect symbol position search data stored in the main ROM 52. This effect symbol position search data is a symbol position at the time of starting or ending the excitation output control in the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode) in the reel effect adjustment output process described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61. This is data used to search whether or not the effect symbol position is an appropriate symbol position.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the effect symbol position search data, the number of searches and the effect symbol position search data are associated with each effect target reel according to the type of reel action.

The reel actions 1 to 8 are as described above, and the reel action 9 is a reel action executed when the effect game state shifts to the "pseudo probability change state 1" in the "AT in progress state", and the reel action 10 Is a reel action executed when the effect game state shifts to the “pseudo-probability change state 2” in the “AT in progress state”. Further, the reel action 11 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "weak cherry", the reel action 12 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "strong cherry", and the reel action 13 corresponds to the pseudo internal winning combination "watermelon". However, the reel action 14 corresponds to the pseudo-internal winning combination "chance combination".

The reel action 9 is a reel action in which the "Red 7" symbols are finally aligned in the middle row on each reel, and the reel action 10 is a reel action in which the "Red 7" symbols are finally aligned on each reel to the right. It is a reel action, and the reel action 11 is a reel action in which the "cherry" pattern is finally displayed on the lower part of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and the upper part of the right reel 3R, and the reel action 12 is. Finally, each reel has a reel action with "cherry" symbols on the bottom, and reel action 13 is a reel action with each reel finally having "watermelon" symbols on the lower right. The action 14 is a reel action in which the "replay" symbol is finally displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, and the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R.

The number of searches is data that defines the number of times to search for the effect symbol position in the reel effect adjustment output process described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61. In other words, it is appropriate as the effect symbol position in the effect target reel. It is data showing the number of symbol positions. For example, when the reel action is "9" and the effect target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), the left reel 3L has one symbol position (symbol) for displaying the "red 7" symbol in the middle row. Since there is only 2) position data, the number of searches is "1", but when the reel action is "12" and the target reel is "left" (left reel 3L), the left reel 3L Since there are two symbol positions (symbol position data 13 and 18) for displaying the "cherry" symbol in the lower row, the number of searches is "2".

That is, when the effect symbol position search data is in the middle of the reel effect selection data, the effect symbol position search data is used as the symbol position when starting the excitation output control in the subsequent reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode). , When the effect symbol position is used to search whether or not it is an appropriate symbol position, and the symbol position adjustment data is at the end of the reel effect selection data (more accurately, before the effect phase end data). Is used to search whether or not the effect symbol position is an appropriate symbol position as the symbol position when the excitation output control in the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode) is terminated.

[Flow of pachislot machine games]
Next, the flow of the game of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a schematic view showing the flow of a game in a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

First, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, as a state in which a player plays a game, an AT game, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and a normal game, which is relatively disadvantageous to the AT game, are used. It is roughly divided into normal games, which are states.

<Normal game>
In the transition from the normal game to the AT game, the number of games after the end of the AT game reached the above-mentioned number of ceiling games (digestion of the number of ceiling games), the above-mentioned fixed combination was won (fixed combination winning), and the above-mentioned. It will be performed when the reel actions 5 to 8 are determined in the main CZ state (CZ success).

Here, when shifting from a normal game to an AT game by winning a fixed combination, first, the basic number of continuations of the AT game is given based on the winning of the fixed combination (150 is added to the AT management difference number counter). ). After that, as described above, reel actions (special reel actions 1 to 4) are determined according to the type of fixed combination, and the number of continuous additions of AT games according to the determined reel actions is given (difference number for AT management). 300, 400 or 500 will be added to the counter).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning combination of the fixed combination is not limited to merely generating the AT game, and the reel action to be executed in the next game is determined based on the winning of the fixed combination. , When the determined reel action is a specific reel action (special reel actions 2 to 4), the number of continuations of the AT game is added based on the execution of this specific reel action. It is possible to improve the sense of expectation not only in the game in which the winning combination is won or won, but also in the next game.

In the present embodiment, the basic continuation number is given based on the winning of the fixed combination, and the additional continuation number is given according to the determined reel action. However, the basic continuation number and the additional continuation number are given. The mode of granting the above is not limited to this. For example, when the special reel action 1 is determined, the first number of continuations is given as the basic number of continuations (150 is added to the AT management difference number counter), and when the special reel action 2 is determined, the basic number of continuations is added. The second number of continuations is given (adding 300 to the AT management difference number counter), and when the special reel action 3 is determined, the third continuation number is given as the basic continuation number (AT management difference number counter). 400 is added to), and when the special reel action 4 is determined, a fourth continuation number may be given as the basic continuation number (500 may be added to the AT management difference number counter). In this case, if the basic number of continuations given by the notification means is notified at the time of execution or end of the special reel action, not only the game that wins or wins the final winning combination, but also the next game. Expectations can be improved. Further, in this case, as the number of additional continuations, the right to continue the AT game again after the end of the AT game (that is, the right to continue the AT game for one set) may be given. Further, the number of rights to continue this AT game may be determined by lottery.

Further, the execution of the reel action based on the winning of the definite combination may be executed not only during the normal game but also during the AT game. In this case, the above-mentioned basic continuation number may be the basic addition number, and the addition continuation number described above may be the addition addition number and be given to the player.

(Main CZ state)
In addition, in a normal game, when a "strong chance lip" is determined as an internal winning combination and a prize is won in either "special lip A1-6" or "special lip B" (strong chance lip is established), the control of the main CPU 51 controls. The production game state shifts from the "normal game state" to the "main CZ state 1", and becomes the main CZ state for eight games. Then, when the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1" or the subsequent "main CZ state 2", a specific reel action (any of the reel actions 5 to 8) is determined and executed. With the success of CZ, the game will shift from normal games to AT games.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the chance zone state (main CZ state), which is a state in which it is easy to shift to the AT game, is derived by the control of the main CPU 51, and in this main CZ state, a plurality of reel actions ( When a specific reel action (any of reel actions 5 to 8) is determined among the reel actions 1 to 8) and executed, the game shifts to the AT game, so that the lock is simply executed. Compared with the case, the expectation in the chance zone state can be significantly improved.

The transition to the main CZ state may be executed not only during the normal game but also during the AT game. In this case, the player decides a specific reel action (any of the reel actions 5 to 8) out of a plurality of reel actions (reel actions 1 to 8), and based on the execution, the player has a predetermined number of ATs. It may be given to. Further, the number of ATs to be given may be changed according to the type of a specific reel action (any of reel actions 5 to 8).

<AT game>
When the game shifts to the AT game, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified until the value of the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less (the number of ATs is exhausted), and the game is stopped according to the notification. By performing the operation, the player can increase the number of medals.

Further, in the AT game, when any one of "Bell Lips 1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the winning lottery for the additional points during AT is won, the points during AT are cumulatively added. Then, when four AT points are added (the value of the AT point counter becomes 4), the AT game continues again even when the number of ATs is exhausted.

Here, in the present embodiment, two types of states, an additional state and a pseudo-probability change state, are provided in which the number of ATs (value of the AT management difference number counter) can be added during the AT game. ..

(Additional state)
In the AT game, "BAR rip 1" or "BAR rip 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, and when any of the winning replays is won by operating the first stop operation other than the left reel 3L, the sub CPU81 It shifts to the additional state by the control of. This additional state continues for 12 games per set, and in the first game (additional state management counter value is 11) and the second game (additional state management counter value is 10), it is used when the additional state is introduced. The additional lottery is executed, and in the 3rd to 12th games (the value of the additional state management counter is 9 to 0), the lottery of the points in the additional state is executed. Then, when the value of the point counter in the added state becomes "100" or more, it is added according to the number of games in the added state in which the value of the point counter in the added state becomes "100" or more. The number of ATs (value of the difference number counter for AT management) is determined, and the addition state can be performed again from the beginning (the set continues).

In the additional state, the value of the AT management difference number counter is not subtracted even if the small winning combination is won, and the player is notified of the stop operation procedure that is most advantageous for the pushing order small winning combination. Therefore, if the addition state itself continues, the number of ATs will be added and the number of medals will increase.

Further, in the added state, the predetermined number, which is the value of the point counter in the added state for continuing the added state, is defined as "100", and the points in the added state exceeding the predetermined number "100" are set. If it is acquired, the surplus will be carried over to the next additional state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a specific start condition is satisfied during the AT game (for example, "BAR rip 1" or "BAR rip 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, and other than the left reel 3L is used. By performing the first stop operation, when one of the winning replays is won and the additional state is digested for 2 games), a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining 10 games are digested or the additional state is consumed). Is continuously determined), and the above-mentioned additional state is controlled. Then, this additional state also functions as a state of increasing the number of ATs and also as a state of increasing the number of medals. Therefore, even if the number of ATs cannot be increased, the player can receive medals. By surely enjoying the benefit of the increase, it is possible to prevent the decline in the interest of the game. In addition, when the added state continues, the points in the added state that are cumulatively added during the added state can be carried over, so that the lottery result of the points in the added state is not wasted and is in the added state. The expectation of lottery can be further improved.

The transition to the additional state may be executed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, it may be decided to shift to the AT game based on the value of the point counter in the added state being "100" or more. Further, the number of ATs initially given may be changed depending on the number of games in the additional state in which the value of the point counter in the additional state becomes "100" or more.

(Pseudo probability change state)
Further, in the AT game, when any one of "Bell Lips 1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination and the transition lottery in the pseudo-probability change state is won, a specific reel action (reel action 9 or 10) is executed, and the main CPU 51 It shifts to the pseudo-probability change state by the control of. In this pseudo-probability change state, the number of pseudo-games when the lock at the start of the game is executed once is determined, and the determined number of pseudo-games can be performed. When determining the number of pseudo games, it is possible to determine the number of pseudo games.

Here, in the pseudo game, an operation (pseudo insertion operation) to the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) locked at the start of the game, an operation to the start lever (start lever 16) (pseudo start operation), The progress is controlled by determining the pseudo-internal winning combination and operating the stop buttons (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) (pseudo-stop operation), and the game is played as if it were a normal game. You can impress the player as if it were in progress. In the present embodiment, the determination of the pseudo-internal winning combination is performed based on the pseudo-start operation as in the determination of the internal winning combination in the normal game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed based on a pseudo closing operation or a pseudo stop operation (particularly, a pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation). Further, the pseudo input operation, the pseudo start operation, and the pseudo stop operation are collectively referred to as a "pseudo game operation". Further, for convenience of explanation, an operation to the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) in the normal game (normal insertion operation), an operation to the start lever (start lever 16) in the normal game (normal start operation), normal The operations (normal stop operations) for the stop buttons (stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) in the game are collectively referred to as "normal game operations".

Then, in the pseudo-probability change state, the number of ATs (value of the difference number counter for AT management) is added to the lottery based on the determined internal winning combination, and the number of ATs (AT number) based on the determined pseudo-internal winning combination ( An additional lottery (value of the difference number counter for AT management) will be performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the opportunity of the additional lottery of the number of ATs based on the internal winning combination but also the opportunity of the additional lottery of the number of ATs based on the pseudo internal winning combination is given during the pseudo-probability change state. Therefore, it is possible to expect a plurality of additional lottery during one unit game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to the additional game. In addition, in a pachislot machine, an upper limit is usually set for the number of medals to be paid out in one unit game (for example, 15), and the specified time required for one unit game is set. Although it is set (for example, 4.1 seconds from the start operation of the previous game to the start operation of the current game), by using the pseudo game, it is shorter than the specified time, for example, without violating these rules. Since the lottery can be generated a plurality of times in a time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the additional lottery state which is advantageous to the player in the pseudo-probability change state.

Further, in the pseudo-probability change state, a relatively larger number of pseudo-games is determined than in the "pseudo-probability change state 1" (first mode) and the "pseudo-probability change state 1" (first mode). There is a "probability change state 2" (second mode), and based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition (for example, winning a high probability transition lottery), the "pseudo probability change state 1" (first mode) is changed to "probability change state 2" (first mode). It will shift to the "pseudo-probability change state 2" (second mode). In this "pseudo-probability change state 2" (second mode), when the pseudo-game is executed, the number of pseudo-games of two or more times is always determined (see (a) of FIG. 30). , It is possible to enjoy the opportunity of the additional lottery of the number of ATs based on the pseudo-internal winning combination a plurality of times, and it is possible to diversify the additional lottery state which is advantageous to the player, which is the pseudo-probability change state.

Further, the transition from the "pseudo-probability change state 2" (second mode) to the "pseudo-probability change state 1" (first mode) is based on the number of times the pseudo-game is actually played (the number of high-securing obstacle games). Therefore, it is possible to surely enjoy the opportunity of the additional lottery of the number of ATs based on the pseudo game in the "pseudo probability change state 2" (second mode).

In the present embodiment, any one of "Bell Lips 1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition lottery in the pseudo-probability change state is won, and a specific reel action (reel action 9 or 10) is executed. Then, it is decided to shift to the pseudo-probability change state, but the transition to the pseudo-probability change state is not limited to this. For example, a lottery for whether or not to shift to the pseudo-probability change state is performed by the sub CPU 81, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, any of the normal rips 1 to 4) is controlled by the sub CPU 81. At the time of winning, a predetermined stop operation order (for example, a stop operation order in which "Belllip" will win a prize) was notified, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to "Belllip") was displayed. Based on the number of times being a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the main CPU 51 may shift the effect gaming state to the "pseudo-probability change state 1" to shift to the pseudo-probability change state.

Further, in this case, as the predetermined stop operation order, the first predetermined stop operation order (for example, "right / left middle" in the case of "normal lip 1" and "middle left / right" in the case of "normal lip 3") , The second predetermined stop operation sequence (for example, "right middle left" at the time of "normal lip 1", "middle right left" at the time of "normal lip 3") can be recognized, and the sub CPU 81 is the second. It is determined in advance whether to notify the predetermined stop operation order of 1 or the second predetermined stop operation order, and the stop operation is performed in the second predetermined stop operation order. If the number of times the combination of symbols is displayed is a specific number of times (for example, twice) or more, the main CPU 51 shifts the effect gaming state to the "pseudo-probability change state 2", and if it is less than the specific number of times, the main CPU 51 , The effect game state may be shifted to the "pseudo probability change state 1". Alternatively, while a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined specific order (for example, a second predetermined stop operation order → a first predetermined stop operation order → a second predetermined stop) In the operation sequence order), the effect game state is set to "pseudo probability change state 1" based on whether or not a game in which the stop operation is performed according to the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order is performed. "" Or "pseudo-probability change state 2" may be assigned. Further, in these cases, the sub CPU 81 may determine whether to notify the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order by lottery for each unit game. Further, when determining whether to notify the first predetermined stop operation order or the second predetermined stop operation order by lottery for each unit game, a specific internal winning combination (for example, watermelon) is used. At the time of winning, the state in which the second predetermined stop operation order is difficult to be notified may be promoted to the state in which the second predetermined stop operation order is easily notified.

Further, the transition to the pseudo-probability change state may be executed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, the AT game or the transition lottery to the main CZ state is performed based on the determined internal winning combination, and the AT game or the transition lottery to the main CZ state is performed based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. Should be done.

[Main control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 62.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the main control process. The main control process described below is started when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 51 executes the power-on processing shown in FIG. 43 (S10). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup is normal, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization processing is executed according to the determination result.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the initialization process at the end of one game (one unit game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization process, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area, the display combination storage area, and the like of the main RAM 53 are cleared.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 44 (S12). In this medal reception / start check process, a process of detecting a medal inserted by a player and a process of detecting a start operation are executed.

Next, the main CPU 51 extracts the random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S13). Here, the random number value is a value used for the internal lottery process (hereinafter, random number value 1) and a value used for the lock lottery process (hereinafter, random number value 2), and in the present embodiment. , 0-65535.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 45 (S14). The main CPU 51 that executes the internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the lock lottery process shown in FIG. 46 (S15). In this lock lottery process, a lottery for whether or not to perform the above-mentioned "lock", a lottery for shifting the production game state, and the like are performed.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the reel stop initial setting process (S16). By this reel stop initial setting process, various stop control information of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R described above is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 53 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

Next, the main CPU 51 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S17). The start command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the game state flag, the type of the effect game state, the type of the lock and its period, the bonus end number counter value, and the like. is there.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the wait process (S18). In this wait process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the previous game (the start of the previous unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. The waiting time to wait until is exhausted. The predetermined time in this wait process, that is, the wait time is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49 (S19). In this lock execution process, the lock at the start of the game, the reel action during the lock execution, and the like are executed based on the lottery result and the like in the lock lottery process in S15.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes a reel rotation start process for rotating all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (S20). Along with this reel rotation start process, "01110000" is stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 26). The reel rotation start control is executed by the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 (more specifically, the reel control process shown in FIG. 58). This interrupt process is a process that is periodically executed at regular intervals (1.1172 ms).

By this interrupt processing, the drive of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started. After that, the drive of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled by this interrupt processing, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is accelerated until the constant speed is reached.

Further, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R reaches a constant speed, the drive of the stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R is controlled by this interrupt process so that the reels 3L, 3C and 3R rotate at a constant speed. Be maintained. When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant speed and the reel index described above is detected, the stop operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is permitted.

Next, the main CPU 51 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 ( S21). The reel rotation start command data is, for example, data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has started.

By receiving the reel rotation start command data, the sub-control circuit 42 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the reel stop control process (S22). By this reel stop control process, the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R is performed. Although not shown, in this reel stop control process, the main CPU 51 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated reel stop command data is sent to the main RAM 53. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. This reel stop command data includes the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position (that is, the symbol position when the stop button is operated), the number of sliding pieces, or the scheduled stop position (that is, the reel is actually scheduled to stop). This is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize the symbol position) and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the winning search process (S23). In this winning search process, after all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line is collated with the symbol combination table, and the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line is identified. To.

Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 23) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 14) are collated, and if there is a match as a result of the collation. , Data corresponding to the matching symbol combination (display combination) is stored in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 22), and the number of payouts (payout number counter value) associated with the combination of symbols is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes a medal payout process of paying out the number of medals corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out as a result of the winning search process (S24). In this medal payout process, the hopper drive circuit 65 is controlled and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number counter value.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the state management process shown in FIG. 51 (S25). In this state management process, the transition control of the effect game state is executed based on the type of the executed reel action, the type of the winning combination, etc., and the output of the external signal from the external centralized terminal board described above is turned on or off. Is managed.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the lock execution process at the end of the game shown in FIG. 54 (S26). In this game end lock execution process, the lock at the end of the game is executed based on a predetermined execution condition.

Next, the main CPU 51 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated winning operation command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S27). .. The winning operation command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the type of display combination, the payout number counter value, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the bonus end check process (S28). By this bonus end check process, the process of terminating the operation of the BB is executed when the BB end condition is satisfied.

In this bonus end check process, specifically, the current payout number counter value is subtracted from the bonus end number counter value stored in the bonus operation check process described later, and it is determined whether or not the value is negative. Then, when it is determined that the value is negative, the BB end processing is executed. In the BB end processing, the BB game state flag and the RB game state flag are turned off, and the game state is shifted to the RT0 game state.

Although not shown, in this bonus end check process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated bonus end command data is sent to the main RAM 53. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. This bonus end command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, that the BB has ended.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the bonus operation check process (S29). By this bonus operation check process, a process of operating the BB or the like based on the combination of the symbols displayed by the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is executed. After executing the process of step S29, the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S11.

Specifically, in this bonus operation check process, first, it is determined whether or not the display combination is BB. Then, when it is determined that the display combination is BB, the BB operation time process is executed. In the BB operation time processing, the BB game state flag and the RB game state flag are turned on, and "75" is set as the value of the bonus end number counter. In addition, the carry-over combination storage area is cleared (the value of bit 0 is reset to "0"). Next, when it is determined that the display combination is not BB, it is determined whether the display combination is a replay. Then, when it is determined that the display combination is a replay, an automatic input request is made. That is, the number of inserted sheets (3 sheets) in the current unit game is controlled so as to be automatically inserted in the next unit game. If it is determined that the display combination is not a replay, the process ends.

Although not shown, in this bonus operation check process, the main CPU 51 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and the generated bonus start command data is sent to the main RAM 53. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. This bonus start command data is data that enables the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, that the BB has started.

<Processing when power is turned on>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a power-on processing executed in step S10 of the main control processing shown in FIG. 42.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S30). In this determination process, whether or not the backup is normal is determined by error detection using the checksum value.

For example, the main CPU 51 stores the set value of the pachi-slot machine 1 and the checksum value calculated from the set value and the like as backup data in the main RAM 53 when the power is turned off, and the determination process (S30) when the power is turned on. In, the set value and the like and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 53 are read out.

Then, the main CPU 51 compares the checksum calculated from the read set value and the like with the backed up checksum, and if the comparison results match, it is determined that the backup is normal.

When the main CPU 51 determines that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 51 sets the backed up setting values and the like in the main RAM 53 (S31). As a result, if the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 53.

After executing the process of step S31, or when it is determined in step S30 that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 51 is a setting change switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1. ) Is on or not (S32). Here, when the main CPU 51 determines that the setting change switch is on (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the initialization process at the time of setting change (S33).

In the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area, the symbol code storage area, and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 53 is cleared, and the set value is cleared. The data stored in the carry-over combination storage area may not be cleared, or may be cleared.

Further, in the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, the data stored in the effect game state storage area is cleared, and the high secured obstacle game number counter and the CZ game number counter are cleared. Then, the "normal game state" is set as the directed game state.

Next, the main CPU 51 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated initialization command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S34). .. The initialization command data is, for example, data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize whether or not the set value has been changed, the set value, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the set value change process (S35). In this set value change process, a set value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of a reset switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1, and subsequently, The set value selected when the start lever 16 is operated is fixed.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the setting change switch is in the ON state (S36), and repeatedly executes the process of step S36 until a determination result that is not in the ON state is obtained.

Here, when the main CPU 51 obtains a determination result that the setting change switch is not in the on state (that is, when the setting change switch is turned from on to off) (NO), the main CPU 51 sub-controls from the main control circuit 41. Initialization command data to be transmitted to the circuit 42 is generated, the generated initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S37), and the power-on processing is completed.

In step S32, when it is determined that the setting change switch is not on (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S38). Here, if it is determined that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 51 executes power-on error processing (S39).

In the power-on error processing, the main CPU 51 displays that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like. In addition, the main CPU 51 does not release the error state by operating the stop release switch (not shown) or the reset switch (not shown) in the state of an error (backup error) in which the backup is not normal. Therefore, the error state is canceled only when a new setting is changed.

If it is determined in step S38 that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 51 restores the state of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the state before the power was cut off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 53. (S40), the process at power-on ends.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic closing request (S50). That is, it is determined whether or not the replay was won in the previous unit game.

In step S50, when it is determined that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 51 executes an automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (S51). Specifically, the main CPU 51 copies the automatic closing counter to the closing number counter and clears the automatic closing counter.

Next, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53. The transmission process is executed (S52). Here, the medal insertion command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the insertion number counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like.

In step S50, if it is determined that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), the main CPU 51 permits the acceptance of medals (S53). For example, the main CPU 51 drives a solenoid (not shown) of the selector 35 to form a path so that medals inserted into the medal insertion port 14 can pass through the selector 35.

In step S50, if the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the acceptance of medals has been prohibited since the previous unit game, so that the process related to the acceptance of medals Is not executed, but even if the replay was won in the previous unit game, the acceptance of medals may be permitted.

After the process of step S52 or S53 is executed, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets in the main RAM 53 according to the gaming state (S54). In the present embodiment, 3 is set as the maximum value of the number of input sheets in any of the gaming states.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not acceptance of medals is permitted (S55). Here, if it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), has the main CPU 51 properly inserted the medals, or has the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B been operated? The medal insertion check process for checking is executed (S56). In this medal insertion check process, when medals are inserted properly, or when medals are inserted by operating the MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B from the credit, the number of medals inserted is increased. The value of the input number counter or the value of the credit counter is updated.

Next, the main CPU 51 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53. The transmission process is executed (S57).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted or credited (S58). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 is subject to the condition that the value of the number-of-insertion counter is 3 and the value of the credit counter is 50, or that the automatic insertion process of step S51 is executed. , It is determined that medals cannot be inserted or credited when the condition is satisfied, and it is determined that medals can be inserted or credited when the condition is not satisfied.

If it is determined in step S58 that medals cannot be inserted or credited (NO), the main CPU 51 prohibits the acceptance of medals (S59). For example, the main CPU 51 forms a path so that the medals inserted into the medal insertion port 14 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 without driving the solenoid of the selector 35.

In step S55, when it is determined that the acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), in step S58, when it is determined that medals can be inserted or credited (YES), or after the process of step S59 is executed. , The main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number of medals that can start the game. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is 3, which is the maximum value (S60).

Here, if it is determined that the number of inserted medals is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S55. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch 16S is ON (S61).

Here, if it is determined that the start switch 16S is not on (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S55. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start switch 6S is on (YES), the main CPU 51 prohibits the acceptance of medals (S62) and ends the medal acceptance / start check process.

<Internal lottery processing>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42.

First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state in the main RAM 53 (S70). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 51 sets any of the internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 15 or 16 in the main RAM 53 according to the gaming state.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S71). The random number value acquired here is a random number value 1. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to a predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S70, acquires one lottery value associated with each winning number of the corresponding set value, and draws a lottery value from the random number value. Is subtracted (S72). That is, the main CPU 51 collates whether or not the internal winning combination associated with the winning number is determined.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the subtraction result in the process of step S72 is less than 0 (S73). Here, when the main CPU 51 determines that the subtraction result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S74).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the winning numbers of the internal lottery table used have been checked (S75), and if it determines that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO). , Return to the process of step S72.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that all the winning numbers have been checked (YES), the main CPU 51 sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S76). In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table for the general game state is set so that the subtraction result does not always become 0 or more when the main CPU 51 finishes checking all the winning numbers. Therefore, the BB game state. Step S76 is not executed except in the case of (RB game state).

In step S73, when the main CPU 51 determines that the subtraction result is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the internal lottery table set in the main RAM 53 and starts from the winning number to the small winning combination / replay data pointer. The value and the value of the bonus data pointer are acquired (S77).

After executing the process of step S76 or S77, the main CPU 51 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 17), and based on the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer, the internal winning combination (S78).

In the processing of step S78, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and 27 bytes indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer acquired in the processing of step S76 or S77. The data value of is determined.

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the internal winning combination data acquired in step S78 in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 21) (S79). In the process of step S79, a 27-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S78 is stored in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 27.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S80). When the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 18) and internally based on the value of the bonus data pointer. Acquire the winning role (S81).

In the process of step S81, the bonus internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and a 27-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in the process of step S76 or S77 is determined. To.

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S81 in the carrying-over combination storage area (see FIG. 24) (S82). In the process of step S82, when "BB" is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S81, the bit 0 corresponding to "BB" in the carry-over storage area is set to "1".

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S83). In this determination process, it is determined in step S82 whether or not the bit 0 corresponding to the "BB" of the carry-over combination storage area is set to "1".

If it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is "BB" (S84). Here, when the main CPU 31 determines that the internal winning combination is "BB" (YES), the main CPU 31 changes the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (S85). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets the RT1 game status flag to "1". In the present embodiment, since the bonus combination is only "BB", the determination process may not be executed.

When it is determined in step S80 that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is not 0 (NO), when it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is 0 (YES), the internal winning combination is "BB" in step S84. (NO) or after executing the process of step S85, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S86). ..

<Lock lottery processing>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process executed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (S90). Specifically, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the RT1 game state flag. When the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is not the RT1 gaming state (NO), the lock lottery process ends.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the directed gaming state is the "AT in progress state" (S91). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the "AT in progress state" (NO), the main CPU 51 executes the normal game lottery process (S102) described later in the description of FIG. 48, and ends the lock lottery process.

If the main CPU 51 determines in step S91 that the effect game state is the "AT in progress state" (YES), then whether or not it is in the pseudo probability change state, that is, the effect game state is "pseudo probability change". It is determined whether or not the state is "state 1" or "pseudo-probability change state 2" (S92). When it is determined that the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability change state 1" or the "pseudo-probability change state 2" (YES), the lottery process (S93) in the pseudo-probability change state described later in the description of FIG. 47 is executed. The lock lottery process is finished.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S92 that the effect gaming state is not the "pseudo-probability change state 1" or the "pseudo-probability change state 2" (NO), the internal winning combination is subsequently any of Bell Lips 1 to 4. It is determined whether or not it is (S94). When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is any of Bell Lips 1 to 4 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a pseudo-probability change state transition lottery based on the random number value 2 (S95).

In this pseudo-probability state transition lottery, for example, the lottery is executed so that the transition to the pseudo-probability state is won with a probability of 512/65536 and the transition to the pseudo-probability state is not won with a probability of 65024/65536. ..

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the pseudo-probability change state transition lottery is the winning (S96). When it is determined that the result of the pseudo-probability change state transition lottery is not a winning (non-winning) (NO), the lock lottery process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the result of the pseudo-probability change state transition lottery is the winning (YES), the main CPU 51 determines the reel action 9 or 10 by the lottery based on the random number value 3 (S97). In the process of step S97, for example, the reel action 9 is determined with a probability of 192/256, and the reel action 10 is determined with a probability of 64/256.

Here, the random number value 3 is different from the random number value 1 and the random number value 2, and is a random number value that is separately generated and acquired each time a need arises in various processes in the main control process. The random number value 3 may be the one that acquires the random number value generated by the above-mentioned random number generator 56 and stores it in the random number value storage area, similarly to the random number value 1 and the random number value 2. It may be acquired by using a latch circuit (not shown) when a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied (for example, when various switches such as the start switch 16S are turned on or off).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets "pseudo-probability change state 1" or "pseudo-probability change state 2" as the effect game state according to the type of reel action (S98). For example, if the determined reel action is reel action 9, "pseudo probability change state 1" is set as the effect game state, and if the determined reel action is reel action 10, "pseudo probability change state" is set as the effect game state. 2 ”is set.

Next, if the "pseudo-probability change state 2" is set as the effect game state, the main CPU 51 sets the number of high-secured obstacle games 5 in the high-secured obstacle number counter (S99), and ends the lock lottery process. To do.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S94 that the internal winning combination is not one of Bell Lips 1 to 4 (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip. (S100). When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (YES), the main CPU 51 executes a lottery in the push order for additional lock based on the random number value 2, and stores the lottery result (S101). The lock lottery process is finished. Further, the main CPU 51 also ends the lock lottery process when it is determined that the internal winning combination is not a strong chance lip (NO).

<Lottery processing during pseudo-probability change state>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the lottery process in the pseudo-probability change state executed in step S93 of the lock lottery process shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the "pseudo probability change state 2" (S200). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is the “pseudo-probability change state 2” (YES), the process proceeds to step S206.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is not the "pseudo-probability change state 2" (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the high-probability transition lottery table shown in FIG. 30 (c) and is based on the random number value 3. , Determine the transition state (S201).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the high-probability transition is performed, that is, whether or not the high-probability transition is determined as the transition state (S202). When the main CPU 51 determines (NO) that the high-probability transition has not been determined as the transition state (the status quo has been determined), the process proceeds to step S206.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the high-probability transition has been determined as the transition state (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the high-securing obstacle game number lottery table shown in FIG. 30 (d) and is based on the random number value 3. , Determine the number of high security obstacle games (S203).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the number of high secured obstacle games determined in step S203 in the high secured obstacle game number counter (S204), and sets the “pseudo probability variation state 2” as the effect game state (S205). ..

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo-game number lottery table shown in FIG. 30A, and determines whether the random number value 3 and the type of the pseudo-probability change state, that is, the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability change state 1". , The pseudo-game count is determined based on whether or not it is in the "pseudo-probability change state 2" (S206), and the pseudo-game count determined in step S206 is set in the pseudo-game count counter (S207).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo game count counter is 0 (S208). When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo-game count counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo-internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 30 (b), and based on the random number value 3, the pseudo-internal winning combination. (S209), and the lottery process in the pseudo-probability change state is terminated. Further, the main CPU 51 also ends the lottery process in the pseudo-probability change state even when it is determined (YES) that the pseudo-game count counter is 0.

<Lottery processing during normal game>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a lottery process during a normal game executed in step S102 of the lock lottery process shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a definite combination (S220). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a cherry lip, a strong cherry lip, or a strong bell. When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a definite combination (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the reel action lottery table for the definite combination shown in FIG. 31, and is executed in the next game based on the random number value 3. , The type of the special reel action (any of the special reel actions 1 to 4) is determined (S221), and the lottery process during the normal game is terminated.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not a definite combination (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not it is in the main CZ state, that is, the effect gaming state is "main CZ state 1" or "main CZ state 1". It is determined whether or not the main CZ state is 2 (S222). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" (NO), the lottery process during the normal game ends.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S222 that the effect gaming state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" (YES), the reel actions 7 or 8 are subsequently set. Whether or not it is determined (S223). When the main CPU 51 determines that the reel actions 7 or 8 are set (YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery process during the normal game.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S223 that the reel action 7 or 8 is not set (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the reel action lottery table for the main CZ state shown in FIG. 29, and refers to the type of the main CZ state (NO). Based on whether the production game state is "main CZ state 1" or "main CZ state 2"), the CZ game number counter value (what game in the main CZ state), and the random number value 2. , Reel action 1 to 8 is determined (S224).

Next, the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the CZ game number counter (S225), and ends the lottery process during the normal game.

Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the production game state is the "normal game state", and the internal winning combination is the push order small combination (small combination / replay data pointer). , "17" to "40"), when the stop button 17L is not operated in the first stop operation, the lottery process during the normal game is performed during the predetermined game (for example, 10 games). It may be configured so as not to be damaged (that is, a "penalty" is given). As a result, it is possible to prevent the developer of the pachislot machine and the player from giving unintended profits to the player.

<Lock execution process at the start of the game>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process executed in step S19 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a special reel action has been determined (S110). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the special reel actions 1 to 4 is determined in the above-mentioned lottery process during the normal game in the previous game. If it is determined that the special reel action has been determined (YES), the effect timer corresponding to the type of the special reel action is set (S111), and the process proceeds to step S114. In the process of step S111, for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined, "3581" (about 4 seconds) is set as the effect timer, and when the special reel action 4 is determined, the special reel action 4 is determined. By setting "13427" (about 15 seconds) as the effect timer, it is controlled so that the lock is executed while the special reel action is executed.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action has not been determined (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the reel action has been determined (S112). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the reel actions 1 to 8 is determined in the above-mentioned lottery process during the normal game in the previous game or the current game. When it is determined that the reel action has been determined (YES), the effect timer corresponding to the type of reel action is set (S113). In the process of step S113, for example, when the reel action 1 is determined, "1791" (about 2 seconds) is set as the effect timer, and when the reel action 6 or 8 is determined, the reel action 6 or 8 is determined. Set "8951" (about 10 seconds) as a production timer.

Next, the main CPU 51 generates lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S114), and plays a game. At the start Ends the lock execution process. Here, the lock command data is data that allows the sub CPU 81 to recognize, for example, the value of the effect timer, the type of the special reel action, the type of the reel action, the type of the pseudo internal winning combination, and the like.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S112 that the reel action has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the pseudo game count counter is 0 (S115). When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game count counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 ends the game start lock execution process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo-game count counter is not 0 (NO), the pseudo-game effect timer is set (S116). Here, the value of the effect timer (for example, "26853" (about 30 seconds)), which is predetermined to be required for each pseudo game, is set in the effect timer during the pseudo game.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (S117). Specifically, in S209 in the above-mentioned pseudo-probability change state lottery process, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-internal winning combination has already been determined. When the main CPU 51 determines (YES) that the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined, the process proceeds to step S119. When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 30B, and based on the random number value 3, the main CPU 51 refers to the pseudo internal winning combination lottery table. The pseudo internal winning combination is determined (S118).

Next, the main CPU 51 generates the lock command data described above to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S119). , The pseudo game process (S120) described later in the description of FIG. 50 is executed, and the pseudo game count counter is decremented by 1 (S121).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pseudo game count counter is 0 (S122). When the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo game count counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S116.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pseudo-game count counter is 0 (YES), it executes the random delay process (S123) and ends the game start lock execution process.

(Random delay processing)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo game process described later in the description of FIG. 50 is completed, the reels 3L and 3C are subjected to the reel rotation start process executed in step S20 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42. The original rotation of the 3Rs will be started. For example, when the execution of the lock at the start of the game is completed after the "watermelon" symbol alignment is pseudo-stopped, the reels 3L, from the state where the "watermelon" symbols are aligned, The original rotation of the 3C and 3R will be started, and there is a risk that the adjustment will impair the fairness of the game. This is because there is a possibility that the player can easily grasp the timing of the stop operation by performing the effect by the reel (for example, a pseudo game), and if no measures are taken, the effect by the reel is intended. This is because it will have an auxiliary function of pushing the eyes.

Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 in the present embodiment, a predetermined symbol is displayed at the end of the execution of the lock at the start of the game (in the above-mentioned example, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned). In this case, a predetermined random value (for example, random value 3) is acquired for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, a timer is set based on the acquired random value, and the number of interrupts of the set timer is increased. The start of rotation of the reel is delayed at random.

With this configuration, even when performing a production with a reel (for example, a pseudo game), there is no risk of making adjustments that impair the fairness of the game, and the game is started (the original rotation of the reel is started). ) Can be made.

<Pseudo game processing>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a pseudo game process executed in step S120 of the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49.

First, the main CPU 51 detects the reel index for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R by the reel position detection circuit 63 described above (S129). That is, the main CPU 51 starts the rotation (hereinafter, pseudo rotation) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R for the purpose of performing the pseudo game by the reel effect control process described later in the description of FIG. 59, and the pseudo rotation thereof. The symbol positions of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be detected.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a stop operation (pseudo stop operation) has been performed on the reels capable of pseudo stop (S130). That is, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during the pseudo rotation have been operated.

When the main CPU 51 determines that the stop operation has been performed on the reels capable of pseudo-stop (YES), the main CPU 51 pseudo-stops the reels at the pseudo-stop positions corresponding to the determined pseudo-internal winning combinations (S131). For example, when a watermelon is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination and a pseudo stop operation is performed by the player, a "watermelon" symbol is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 3L, the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, and the lower stage of the right reel 3R. Is pseudo-stopped.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the pseudo-stop state holding data according to the type of the reel that has been pseudo-stopped (S132). As a result, for example, in the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, rotation in the reverse rotation direction and rotation in the forward rotation direction are controlled to be alternately performed at different timings. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during the pseudo stop appear to vibrate in the vertical direction. Therefore, the stop of each reel by the pseudo stop control and the normal stop control are used. It is possible to prevent confusion with the stop of each reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is a reel capable of pseudo-stop (S133). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is still in pseudo rotation. If it is determined that there is a reel that can be pseudo-stopped (YES), the process returns to step S130, and if it is determined that there is no reel that can be pseudo-stopped (NO), the process proceeds to step S136.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S130 that the reel that can be pseudo-stopped has not been stopped (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 (S134). .. If it is determined that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the process returns to step S130, and if it is determined that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the determined pseudo-internal winning combination The reel action corresponding to the above is set (S135), and the process proceeds to step S138.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo game is performed and the player does not operate the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R, the pseudo internal winning combination determined is met. Since the reel action is set and the reel is automatically pseudo-stopped at the pseudo-stop position according to the determined pseudo-internal winning combination, even for the player who did not perform the pseudo-stop operation. , You can surely enjoy the reel production by the pseudo game.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S133 that there is no reel that can be pseudo-stopped (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the bet button has been operated (S136). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the MAX bet button 15A or the 1BET button 15B has been operated. If the main CPU 51 determines that the bet button has been operated (YES), the process proceeds to step S138.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bet button has not been operated (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 (S137). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S136.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S137 that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not there has been an operation of the start lever (pseudo start operation) (S138). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated. If it is determined that there is no operation of the start lever (NO), the process of step S138 is repeatedly executed. As a result, even if one pseudo-game is automatically advanced, the start of the next pseudo-game will be executed based on the player's pseudo-start operation. It is possible to surely enjoy the reel effect, and it is also possible to surely enjoy the benefit of the additional decision based on the pseudo-internal winning combination.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S138 that the start lever is operated (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 (S139). If it is determined that the effect timer is 0 (YES), the pseudo game process is terminated. If it is determined that the effect timer is not 0 (NO), the effect timer is updated to 0 (S140), and the pseudo game process ends.

In step S138, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect timer is 0 even if it determines that the start lever is not operated (NO), and determines that the effect timer is 0. If it is determined, the pseudo-game process may be terminated. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the pseudo game from hindering the smooth progress of the normal game.

Further, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S130 that the reel that can be pseudo-stopped has been stopped (YES), and in step S136, it determines that the bet button has been operated (YES), in step S138. , When it is determined that there is an operation of the start lever (YES), in any one or more cases, or in all cases, a predetermined value is added to the effect timer, or the initial value is reset to the effect timer. You may do it. With this configuration, the player performing each of the above-mentioned operations in the simulated game can be sure to enjoy the reel effect by the simulated game by preventing the effect timer from becoming zero. It is possible to prevent the reel production by the pseudo game from becoming redundant more than necessary.

<State management processing>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a state management process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the "AT in progress state" (S150). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is the "AT in progress state" (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the AT in progress state management process (S151) described later in the description of FIG. 52, and proceeds to the process of step S160. ..

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is not the "AT in progress state" (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the effect game state is the main CZ state, that is, the effect game state is the "main CZ state 1". Or, it is determined whether or not it is the "main CZ state 2" (S152). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect gaming state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" (YES), the process proceeds to step S155.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S152 that the effect game state is not "main CZ state 1" or "main CZ state 2" (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently wins a strong chance lip at the first left stop. Whether or not it was done, that is, "strong chance lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "11)" is determined as the internal winning combination, and the left reel 3L is first stopped, so that the "special lip" is performed. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won in either "A1 to 6" or "Special Lip B" (S153). If it is determined that the strong chance lip has been won at the first left stop (YES), "main CZ state 1" is set as the production game state (S154), and the process proceeds to step S160. Also, when it is determined that the strong chance lip has not been won at the first stop on the left (NO), the process proceeds to step S160.

If the main CPU 51 determines in step S152 that the effect gaming state is the "main CZ state 1" or the "main CZ state 2" (YES), has the reel action 3 or 4 been subsequently executed? It is determined whether or not (S155). When it is determined that the reel action 3 or 4 has been executed (YES), the "main CZ state 2" is set as the effect game state (S156), and the state management process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel actions 3 or 4 have not been executed (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not any of the reel actions 5 to 8 has been executed (S157). When the main CPU 51 determines that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 has been executed (YES), the main CPU 51 clears the set production game state, "main CZ state 1", or "main CZ state 2". (S159), the state management process is terminated.

If the main CPU 51 determines in step S157 that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 has not been executed (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 8. (S158). ). When the main CPU 51 determines that the CZ game number counter is 8 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the above-described S159 process and ends the state management process. The main CPU 51 also ends the state management process when it determines that the CZ game number counter is not 8 (NO).

<AT state management process>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the state management process during AT executed in step S151 of the state management process shown in FIG. 51.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect game state is the "pseudo probability change state 2" (S230). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect game state is the "pseudo-probability change state 2" (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the pseudo-game has been executed (S231). Specifically, in step S206 of the lottery process during the pseudo-probability change state shown in FIG. 47, the number of pseudo games is determined to be one or more times, and in step S120 of the lock execution process at the start of the game shown in FIG. 49, the pseudo game Determine if the process has been executed. When the main CPU 51 determines (NO) that the pseudo game has not been executed, the process proceeds to the process of step S236.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S231 that the pseudo game has been executed (YES), the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the high secured obstacle game number counter (S232). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the high secured obstacle number counter is 0 (S233). When the main CPU 51 determines that the number of high-securing obstacle games counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 sets "pseudo-probability change state 1" as the effect game state (S234), and proceeds to the process of step S236. That is, the main CPU 51 ends the effect game state "pseudo-probability change state 2" based on the fact that the high secured obstacle number counter becomes 0. Further, the main CPU 51 also proceeds to the process of step S236 when it is determined (YES) that the number of high-securing obstacle games counter is not 0.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S230 that the effect game state is not the "pseudo probability change state 2" (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the effect game state is the "pseudo probability change state 1". Judgment (S235). When the main CPU 51 determines (NO) that the effect gaming state is not the "pseudo-probability change state 1", the process proceeds to step S238.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S235 that the effect gaming state is the "pseudo-probability change state 1" (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the bell lip has been won (S236). If it is determined that the bell lip has not been won (NO), the process proceeds to step S238. In addition, when it is determined that the Bell Lip has won a prize (YES), the pseudo-probability change state is cleared (S237). That is, the winning of the bell lip is a condition for ending the production game states "pseudo-probability change state 1" and "pseudo-probability change state 2".

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not any of the bells has won a prize (S238). Specifically, one of the "middle left and right bells", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell", and "right middle left bell", which are "pushing order small roles", is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols (see FIG. 14) relating to any of the small wins for which seven medals will be paid out has won a prize. When it is determined that any of the bells has been won (YES), the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the winning number counter during the AT game (S239), and ends the AT state management process. Further, the main CPU 51 also ends the AT-in-time state management process when it is determined that one of the bells has not won a prize (NO).

In step S238, the main CPU 51 may determine whether or not any of the bells has been won, not whether or not any of the bells has been won. Specifically, one of the "pushing order small role" "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell" is determined as the internal winning role as the internal winning role. If it is determined whether or not the item has been hit and it is determined that any of the bells has been won, the process of step S239 may be executed. That is, the winning number counter during the AT game may be a counter that is updated by winning the "pushing order small winning combination". With this configuration, for example, in an AT game, between a player who ignores the notified stop operation order and performs a stop operation, and a player who keeps the notified stop operation order and performs a stop operation. Since there will be a difference in the profits that can be obtained, it is possible to increase the tension of the game in the AT game and improve the interest of the game.

<External signal output management processing>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the external signal output management process executed in step S160 of the state management process shown in FIG. 51. In the present embodiment, the external signal 1 functions as a signal for displaying the number of times the AT game is continued, that is, how long the AT game is continued on an external display or the like, and the external signal 2 is It functions as a signal for displaying the number of first hits of the AT game, that is, the transition from the normal game to the AT game on an external display or the like.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not only the external signal 2 is on, that is, whether or not only the external signal 2 is output (S250). When it is determined that only the external signal 2 is on (YES), the external signal 1 is set to on, that is, the output of the external signal 1 is started (S251), the winning count counter during the AT game, and the AT end check counter. Is set to an initial value (for example, 0) (S252), and the external signal output management process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that only the external signal 2 is not on (NO), subsequently, whether the external signals 1 and 2 are both on, that is, whether the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are both output. Is determined (S253).

When the main CPU 51 determines that both the external signals 1 and 2 are on (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the winning number counter during the AT game is a predetermined value (S254). Here, for example, "38" is specified as the predetermined value. When the main CPU 51 determines that the winning number counter during the AT game is a predetermined value (YES), the external signal 1 is turned off, that is, the output of the external signal 1 is terminated (S255), and the external signal output management process is performed. To finish.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S254 that the winning count counter during the AT game is not a predetermined value (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the middle / right first stop is made when the push order bell is won (NO). S256). Specifically, one of the "pushing order small role" "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell" is decided as the internal winning role as the internal winning role. In that case, it is determined whether or not the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R has been first stopped.

If the main CPU 51 determines in step S256 that the middle / right first stop is made when the push order bell is won (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the AT end check counter is 1 or more (S257). ). When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management process. If the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 0) in the AT end check counter (S258), and performs external signal output management processing. finish.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S256 that the middle / right first stop is not made when the push order bell is won (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the left first stop is made when the push order bell is hit. (S259). Specifically, one of the "pushing order small role" "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell" is decided as the internal winning role as the internal winning role. If so, it is determined whether or not the left reel 3L has been first stopped. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is not stopped when the push order bell is won (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management process.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S259 that the left first stop is made when the push order bell is won (YES), the AT end check counter is incremented by 1 (S260), and then the AT end check counter is set to 2. It is determined whether or not there is (S261). When the main CPU 51 determines that the AT end check counter is not 2, the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management process.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S261 that the AT end check counter is 2 (YES), the main CPU 51 turns off the external signals 1 and 2, that is, ends the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 (S262). ), Clear the set production game state, "AT in progress state" (S263), and end the external signal output management process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S253 that both the external signals 1 and 2 are not on (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not any of the bells has been won at the first middle / right stop. Judgment (S264). Specifically, one of the "middle left and right bells", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell", and "right middle left bell", which are "pushing order small roles", is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, whether or not the combination of symbols related to any of the small winning combinations (see FIG. 14) in which the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R is first stopped and seven medals are paid out is won. To judge. When the main CPU 51 determines that any of the bells has been won at the first stop on the middle or right side (YES), the winning number counter during the normal game is incremented by 1 (S265).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning number counter during the normal game is 3. (S266). When the main CPU 51 determines (NO) that the winning number counter during the normal game is not 3, the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning number counter during the normal game is 3 (YES), the external signal 2 is turned on, that is, the output of the external signal 2 is started (S267), and the effect game state is set. “AT in progress” is set (S268), and the external signal output management process is terminated.

If the main CPU 51 determines in step S264 that it has not won any of the bells in the middle / right first stop (NO), then whether or not the left first stop is made when the push order bell is won. Is determined (S269). Specifically, one of the "pushing order small role" "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell" and "right middle left bell" is decided as the internal winning role as the internal winning role. If so, it is determined whether or not the left reel 3L has been first stopped. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is not stopped when the push order bell is won (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the external signal output management process. If the main CPU 51 determines that the left first stop is made when the push order bell is won (YES), the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 0) in the winning number counter during the normal game (S270) and outputs an external signal. End the management process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the start condition for shifting to the AT game is satisfied, and after shifting from the normal game to the AT game, the value of the winning count counter during the normal game becomes 3 (that is, "push"). Based on the fact that "Sequential small role" was the correct answer for 3 consecutive pushes at the time of winning), the production game state was changed to "AT in progress", the output of the external signal 2 was started, and the external signal was started in the next game. Based on the fact that only 2 is output, the output of the external signal 1 is started, and when the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output, the value of the winning count counter during the AT game becomes 38. (That is, in the "AT in progress state", the number of winnings of the "pushing order small winning combination" is 38 times), and only the output of the external signal 1 is terminated. Here, if the AT game continues, the output of the external signal 1 will be started again in the next game. In addition, when the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are output, the value of the AT end check counter becomes 2 (that is, the push order is incorrect for two consecutive times when the "push order small combination" is won). Based on this, the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, the state of the AT game, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is output from the external centralized terminal plate of the pachi-slot machine 1 by outputting at least two types of external signals, such as an external display. Therefore, the number of first hits of the AT game and the number of times the AT game is continued, which are of great interest to the player, can be appropriately displayed on an external display or the like. Further, with a simple configuration, the output timing of the external signal 1 and the output timing of the external signal 2 can be made different, so that the control load on the external display side can be reduced and a communication error or the like occurs. Can also be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the condition for starting the output of the external signal 2 is that the value of the winning count counter during the normal game is 3 (that is, the pushing order is correct for 3 consecutive times when the "pushing order small winning combination" is won. It is configured so that the establishment of the AT game is delayed from the start condition (start of the AT game controlled by the control of the sub CPU 81).

Further, in the present embodiment, the condition for ending the output of the external signal 1 is that the value of the winning number counter during the AT game is 38 (that is, in the "AT in progress state", the "pushing order small winning combination" The number of winnings is 38 times), and the establishment is configured to arrive later than the end condition for ending the AT game (the end of the AT game under the control of the sub CPU 81). Specifically, as will be described later in the description of FIG. 73, when "150" is set as the initial value of the AT management difference number counter, the addition of the winning number counter during the AT game is started. Since it is after winning the "pushing order small role" three times, the value of the AT management difference number counter at that time is "150-4 sheets x 3 times = 138". After that, when the number of winnings of the "pushing order small winning combination" becomes 35 times in the "AT in progress state", the value of the AT management difference number counter becomes "138-4 sheets x 35 times = -2". The condition for ending the output of the external signal 1 arrives later than the end condition for ending the AT game.

Then, when the AT game ends, when the value of the AT end check counter becomes 2, the output of the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 ends, and when the AT game continues, the value of the AT end check counter. Before becomes 2, the value of the winning count counter during the AT game becomes 38, the output of the external signal 1 is once finished, and then the output of the external signal 1 is started again to indicate the number of times the AT is continued. Information can be displayed on an external display. Since the initial value "150" of the AT management difference number counter can be replaced with the AT count "38 times", if the AT count "38 times" is regarded as one set, the output of the external signal 1 is output. It can also be said that it is possible to display information indicating how many sets of AT games have been performed on the external display.

With this configuration, the start and end of the AT game can be notified to the player earlier than the display by the external display or the like by the notification by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like, so that the game is performed. It is possible to improve the convenience of the player who is playing. In addition, since the subtraction value of the AT management difference number counter due to the winning of the "pushing order small winning combination" and the number of winnings are approximately the same, the number of times the AT game is continued (1 set) is particularly determined. It can be displayed properly with a simple configuration.

<Lock execution process at the end of the game>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a game end lock execution process executed in step S26 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (S170). When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not a strong chance lip (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock execution process at the end of the game.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the stop operation has been performed in the additional lock pressing order (S171). Here, the push order for the additional lock is the stop operation order stored in S101 of the lock lottery process shown in FIG. 46, and specifically, the left first stop (that is, the stop operation order "left middle right". , Or "left and right middle"), which was determined by lottery from the four stop operation sequences (that is, the stop operation order "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right left middle" or "right middle left"). It is one stop operation sequence. If the main CPU 51 determines (NO) that the stop operation is not performed in the additional lock push order, the lock execution process at the end of the game is terminated.

If the main CPU determines in step S171 that the stop operation is performed in the additional lock push order (YES), the lock data is set after all stops (S173), and "3581" (about 4 seconds) is set in the effect timer. ) Is set (S174), the above-mentioned lock command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 is generated, and the generated lock command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 53 (S175). ), Ends the lock execution process at the end of the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, and the stop operation is performed at the left first stop to win a prize, the effect gaming state If is the "normal game state", the effect game state shifts to the "main CZ state 1", but if the effect game state is the "AT in progress state", no profit is given.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the AT game is started by the control of the sub CPU 81, the effect game state shifts to the "AT in progress state" by the control of the main CPU 51, so that the AT game is in progress. , The production game state may not be "AT in progress state" (this state may be referred to as "AT preparation state"), but in this case, the production game state is "main CZ state 1". It is not appropriate to move to.

On the other hand, although the winning probability of the strong chance lip does not change depending on each production game state or whether it is a normal game or an AT game (see FIG. 15), there is no profit depending on the winning time of the strong chance lip. It is also unreasonable that will not be granted.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, the push order for the additional lock is determined by lottery, and the stop operation is performed according to the determined push order for the additional lock. In that case, a profit different from the profit of shifting the production game state to the "main CZ state 1" is given.

Specifically, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, during the normal game, the sub CPU 81 controls whether to notify the player of the stop operation order for causing the player to make the left first stop. Alternatively, when a penalty is given as described above, by intentionally not executing the notification of the stop operation order, the player is made to perform the stop operation by the left first stop, and the effect game state is set to "main CZ state 1". It is configured to give the benefit of shifting to.

On the other hand, during the AT game or the AT preparation state, first, a lottery for whether or not to notify the push order for the additional lock is executed by the control of the sub CPU 81, and when the lottery result is the winning, the lottery is executed. The stop operation order related to the determined additional lock push order is notified, and if the stop operation is performed according to this notification, the game end lock based on the lock data is executed after all stops, and the game ends. Based on the execution of the lock, the lottery for adding (adding) the number of ATs is executed, and the benefit of adding (adding) the number of ATs is given.

With this configuration, during AT game or AT preparation state, it is possible to prevent the transition to the chance zone state (main CZ state) where reel actions (for example, reel actions 1 to 8) can occur. Even if the game content is prevented from becoming difficult to understand and the game is not shifted to the chance zone state (main CZ state), a specific internal winning combination (for example, strong chance lip) has been decided. The profit based on can be given to the player as a different profit.

Further, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to determine whether or not to give the above-mentioned different benefits by controlling the sub CPU 81, the benefits of the player and the benefits of the amusement park can be combined with a simple configuration. It becomes possible to manage equity appropriately.

<Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 51. This process is performed every 1.1172 ms.

First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S320). Next, the main CPU 51 executes the input port check process described later in the description of FIG. 56 (S321). In this input port check process, for example, the presence or absence of signals from various switches and sensors connected to the main CPU 51 is confirmed.

For example, the main CPU 51 stores on-edge and off-edge information of various switches such as the start switch 16S and the stop switch 17S and on / off information of various sensors such as the medal sensor 35S in the main RAM 53.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the timer update process (S322). Next, the main CPU 51 executes the communication data transmission process described later in the description of FIG. 57 (S323). Next, the main CPU 51 executes the reel control process described later in the description of FIG. 57 (S324).

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the lamp 7SEG drive process (S325). For example, the main CPU 51 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like on various display units. Next, the main CPU 51 restores the register (S326) and ends the interrupt process that occurs periodically.

<Input port check process>
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 51 shown in FIG. 55.

First, the main CPU 51 checks the state of each input port (S330). Next, the main CPU 51 stores the state of the input port before the previous interrupt, that is, one interrupt, in the main RAM 53 (S331), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 53 (S332).

In this way, by comparing the state of the input port one interrupt before and the state of the current input port, the main CPU 51 can confirm the state of both input ports, and the state of the input port can be confirmed. It is checked whether the state has changed, for example, whether the MAX bet button 15A, the 1BET button 15B, the start lever 16 and the like have been operated.

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 53 (S333). For example, in the main CPU 51, when the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 16S was the data indicating off before one interrupt, but now it is the data indicating on, it is transferred to the on-edge. The on-edge information indicating that this is stored in the main RAM 53, and the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 16S was the data indicating on before one interrupt, but is now the data indicating off. If there is, the off-edge information indicating that the data has been transferred to the off-edge is stored in the main RAM 53.

<Communication data transmission processing>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a communication data transmission process executed in step S323 of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 51 shown in FIG. 55.

First, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the communication data transmission timer (S340). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the communication data transmission timer is 0 (S341).

Here, if it is determined that the communication data transmission timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the communication data transmission process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the communication data transmission timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (S342).

Here, when it is determined that there is no untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (NO), the main CPU 51 generates non-operation command data, and the generated non-operation command data is assigned to the main RAM 53. It is stored in the storage area (S343).

In the non-operation command data, on-edge and off-edge information of various switches and on / off information of various sensors stored in the above-mentioned input port check process are set as each parameter. As a result, it is possible to prevent an interrupt process in which the command is not transmitted and prevent fraudulent acts against the command transmission, and by causing the sub CPU 81 to recognize this information, the period during which the operation is originally invalid is possible. It is possible to change the effect based on the operation (for example, the operation on the MAX bet button 15A while the reel is rotating).

When it is determined in step S342 that there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (YES), or after executing the process of step S343, the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 14) in the communication data transmission timer. (S344).

Next, the main CPU 51 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 42 (S345). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transmission of communication data is completed (S346).

Here, if it is determined that the transmission of the communication data is not completed (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S345. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transmission of communication data is completed (YES), the main CPU 51 updates the communication data storage area so as to clear it (S347), and ends the communication data transmission process.

<Reel control processing>
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed in step S324 of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 51 shown in FIG. 55.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel action has been determined (S271). Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the above-mentioned reel actions 1 to 14 (reel actions 11 to 14 include a pseudo internal winning combination) or the special reel actions 1 to 4 are determined. When the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action has been determined (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the reel effect control process (S272) described later in the description of FIG. 59, and ends the reel control process. Although not shown, the main CPU 51 also determines when to execute the reel action, and determines whether or not to perform the process of step S272. For example, since the reel actions 7 and 8 execute the reel action in the next game of the determined game, the main CPU 51 determines the game of the next game when the reel actions 7 and 8 are determined. The process of step S272 is performed by determining that the start time (when the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49 is executed) is the execution time.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the reel action has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 executes the normal reel control process (S273) and ends the reel control process.

Here, in this normal reel control process, the main CPU 51 drives and controls each stepping motor based on the rotation start request of each reel in the reel rotation start process (S20 of FIG. 42) to rotate each reel. A constant speed that maintains a predetermined speed by executing an acceleration process for accelerating and driving and controlling each stepping motor based on the fact that each reel reaches a predetermined speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute). The process is executed, and the stop process for stopping the rotation of each reel is executed by driving and controlling each stepping motor based on the rotation stop request of each reel in the stop control process (S22 in FIG. 42).

<Reel production control processing>
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a reel effect control process executed in step S272 of the reel control process shown in FIG. 58.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the reel effect selection data according to the type of reel action (S274). Here, the reel effect selection data is data configured as shown in FIG. 38 as an example.

Next, the main CPU 51 executes the effect target reel selection process (S275). Specifically, the main CPU 51 selects the most appropriate effect target reel for performing the reel effect according to the set reel effect selection data. For example, when the reel effect selection data corresponds to a reel effect in which each reel is rotated in the order of left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R, the left reel is selected in this effect target reel selection process. The reels to be produced are selected in the order of 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The selection mode of the reel to be produced is not limited to this. For example, among the reels during pseudo rotation, they may be set in a predetermined order (for example, the order in which the reels on the left side are set), or may be set randomly. Further, the reel effect selection data may include data that can identify the order in which the effect target reels are set.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the reel effect selection data, the number of effects according to the effect target reel according to the effect target reel, and the excitation output selection data (S276). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 38, when the reel effect selection data is "1" and the effect target reel is the middle reel 3C, when the process of step S276 is first executed, 1 is set as the number of effects. It is set, and the excitation output table for reverse acceleration rotation is set as the selection data for excitation output. Further, in the process of step S276, when the effect target reel is changed in the effect target reel change control process of step S288 described later, the effect number of the resumed portion and the excitation output selection data are set.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data (S277). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 38, the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 or Determine if it is 2. When the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output selection data is not the symbol position adjustment data (NO), the process proceeds to step S279. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the excitation output selection data is the symbol position adjustment data (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the reel effect adjustment output process (S278) described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the effect excitation output table based on the excitation output selection data or the result of the reel effect adjustment output process (S279). The result of the reel effect adjustment output processing will be described later in the description of FIGS. 60 and 61.

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the set effect excitation output table, and sets the excitation direction data and the start data of the effect excitation timer (S280). Here, the effect excitation output table is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

Next, the main CPU 51 outputs the excitation data based on the excitation direction data, and subtracts 1 from the effect excitation timer (S281). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect excitation timer is 0 (S282). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect excitation timer is not 0 (NO), the process returns to the process of step S281.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect excitation timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the set effect excitation output table and updates the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer (S283). ). Specifically, when the excitation direction data and the head data of the effect excitation timer are set and it is determined that the effect excitation timer is 0, the excitation direction data and the effect excitation timer are started from the beginning. Update to the second data (ie, the next data). If the next data in the effect excitation output table is an end code, the data is updated to the end code.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the effect excitation output table is an end code (S284). When the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the effect excitation output table is not an end code (NO), the main CPU 51 returns to the process of step S281. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the effect excitation output table is an end code (YES), whether or not the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data is subsequently executed for the number of effects. Is determined (S285). When it is determined that the main CPU 51 has not executed the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data for the number of times of effect (NO), the process returns to the process of step S280.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S285 that the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data has been executed for the number of effects (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the set reel effect selection data and refers to the number of effects and the number of effects. The selection data for excitation output is updated (S286). Specifically, the number of times of effect and the selection data for excitation output are updated to the next data. Further, when the next data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data, the data is updated to the effect phase end data.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data (S287). When the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the reel effect selection data is not the effect phase end data (NO), the main CPU 51 executes the effect target reel change control process (S288) and returns to the process of step S276. In this effect target reel change control process, in performing the reel effect, the main CPU 51 is performing the effect control of one effect target reel (for example, the left reel 3L) while the other effect target reels (for example, the middle reel 3C, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the effect control of the right reel 3R) should be started or restarted, and when it is determined that the effect control should be started or restarted, the effect target reel is changed to one effect target reel (for example,). , Left reel 3L) to another effect target reel (for example, middle reel 3C) is executed. With this configuration, for example, even if the reel effect selection data has a large number of effect counts and excitation output selection data specified for a specific effect target reel, other effect target reels are linked. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly execute the intended reel effect. Whether or not the reel to be produced should be changed may be determined according to the specified number of times of production and / and the number of selection data for excitation output, and a dedicated change control timer may be set. The determination may be made based on the fact that the change control timer becomes 0 and the process of step S286 is completed. Further, the reel effect selection data may include data indicating that the effect target reel should be changed and data that can identify the effect target reel to be changed.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the effect has been completed on all reels (S289). ). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data in all the effect target reels. When the main CPU 51 determines that the production has not been completed on all the reels (NO), the process returns to the process of step S275. Further, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect has been completed on all the reels (YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel effect control process.

<Reel production adjustment output processing>
60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the reel effect adjustment output process executed in step S278 of the reel effect control process shown in FIG. 59.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 (S290). When the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 1 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the effect symbol position update process (S291) described later in the description of FIG. 62, and subsequently, the effect symbol. It is determined whether or not the position is 0 (S292). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is not 0 (NO), the process proceeds to step S294.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S292 that the effect symbol position is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the set reel effect selection data and updates the effect number of times and the excitation output selection data (YES). S293). Specifically, the number of times of effect and the selection data for excitation output are updated to the next data. Further, when the next data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data, the data is updated to the effect phase end data.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the reverse rotation excitation output table as the effect excitation output table (S294), and ends the reel effect adjustment output process. Here, the reverse rotation excitation output table is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in step S290 that the symbol position adjustment data is not the symbol position adjustment data 1 (NO), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 3. Judgment (S295). When the main CPU 51 determines that the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 3 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the effect symbol position update process (S296) described later in the description of FIG. 62 to execute the effect excitation output table. The excitation output table 1 for constant speed rotation is set (S297), and the reel effect adjustment output process is completed. Here, the constant-speed rotation excitation output table 1 is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S295 that the symbol position adjustment data is not the symbol position adjustment data 3 (YES), that is, assuming that the symbol position adjustment data is the symbol position adjustment data 2, in the description of FIG. The effect symbol position update process (S298), which will be described later, is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the effect symbol position is data of less than one rotation (S299). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect symbol position updated in the effect symbol position update process in step S298 is a symbol position that can be identified without detecting the reel index. That is, the reel index is detected when each reel reaches the reference position (the position where the symbol position data is 0) by the reel position detection circuit 63, whereas the main CPU 51 is based on the effect symbol position. It is determined whether or not the symbol position passes through the position.

When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is not data of less than one rotation (NO), the main CPU 51 sets an acceleration rotation excitation output table as the effect excitation output table (S300), and performs reel effect adjustment output processing. finish. Here, the excitation output table for acceleration rotation is a table configured as shown by an example in FIG. 39.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position is data of less than one rotation (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not it is the effect symbol position search phase (S301). Although not shown in the example of the reel effect selection data shown in FIG. 38, a plurality of symbol position adjustment data are defined as the excitation output selection data in one reel effect selection data. In that case, data indicating whether or not to collate with the effect symbol position search data, which will be described later, is further defined in any of them, and based on the data, it is determined whether or not the effect symbol position search phase is in effect. Will be done.

When the main CPU 51 determines that it is not in the effect symbol position search phase (NO), it sets the constant speed rotation excitation output table 2 as the effect excitation output table (S308), and ends the reel effect adjustment output process. .. Here, the constant speed rotation excitation output table 2 is a table configured as shown in FIG. 39 as an example.

When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position search phase is in effect (YES), the main CPU 51 sets the effect symbol position search data and the number of searches according to the type of reel action and the effect target reel (S302). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 40, when the reel action 9 is determined and the effect target reel is “left” (left reel 3L), the effect symbol position search data is 2 (symbol position data is 2). The data indicating the position) is set, and 1 is set as the number of searches.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the effect symbol position and the effect symbol position search data match (S303). When the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position and the effect symbol position search data match (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the set reel effect selection data and updates the effect number of times and the excitation output selection data (YES). S304). Specifically, the number of times of effect and the selection data for excitation output are updated to the next data. Further, when the next data in the reel effect selection data is the effect phase end data, the data is updated to the effect phase end data. Next, the main CPU 51 executes the process of S308 described above, and ends the reel effect adjustment output process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effect symbol position and the effect symbol position search data do not match (NO), the number of searches is subtracted by 1 (S305), and then whether or not the number of searches is 0. Is determined (S306). When the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 51 updates the effect symbol position search data (S307), and returns to the process of step S303.

If the main CPU 51 determines in step S306 that the number of searches is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 executes the above-mentioned process of S308 and ends the reel effect adjustment output process.

<Production symbol position update process>
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol position update process executed in steps S291, step S296, and step S298 of the reel effect adjustment output process shown in FIGS. 60 and 61.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the stop position at the end of the previous game or the end of the previous reel effect as the effect symbol position (S310). That is, when the symbol position adjustment data is at the beginning of the reel effect selection data, the stop position at the end of the previous game is set as the effect symbol position, and the symbol position adjustment data is in the middle or the end of the reel effect selection data. In the case of, the stop position at the end of the previous reel effect (that is, at the end of the excitation output control based on the excitation output selection data before the symbol position adjustment data) is set as the effect symbol position.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the input state of the previous reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) and the input state of the current reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) (S311). Specifically, on-edge or off-edge information related to the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) stored in the input port check process shown in FIG. 56 is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is off-edge (S312). That is, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the input data of the input port assigned to the reel position detection circuit 63 is the data indicating on, but this time it is the data indicating off.

When the main CPU 51 determines that the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is off-edge (YES), the main CPU 51 clears the effect symbol position (S313) and ends the effect symbol position update process. On the other hand, when the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) determines that the reel sensor (reel position detection circuit 63) is not off-edge, the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the effect symbol position (S314), and ends the effect symbol position update process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode) is executed based on the reel effect selection data, and the symbol position adjustment data is defined in the reel effect selection data. Is configured to update the effect symbol position, select an effect excitation output table according to the updated effect symbol position and the type of symbol position adjustment data, and perform excitation output control. For example, even when the excitation output is controlled by the same forward rotation, if a small amount of rotation is sufficient according to the type of the updated effect symbol position and symbol position adjustment data, the excitation output for constant speed rotation When the table 1 or 2 is set and a large amount of rotation is required, the excitation output table for acceleration rotation is set. That is, it is not always necessary to search for the symbol position and execute the reel effect, and it is not necessary to specify the data for selecting the reel effect in all ways. Therefore, it is appropriate according to the purpose of the effect while reducing the amount of data. It is possible to perform reel production. Therefore, even if a deviation occurs in the reel symbol position before the start of the reel production or during the reel production, the deviation is adjusted without increasing the control load, and the player can perform the intended reel production. Will be able to enjoy it.

[Sub-control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 75.

<Power-on process>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a power-on process of the sub CPU 81 at the time of power-on.

First, the sub CPU 81 executes the initialization process (S350). In this process, the sub CPU 81 checks for errors in the sub RAM 83 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, which is a task group for timer interrupt synchronization, and a sound control task.

Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 64 (S351). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 81 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 81 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving this timer interrupt event message, the lamp control task of various lamps. It is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 (S352). In the sound control task, the sound output state from the speakers 20L and 20R is controlled by the sub CPU 81. Next, the sub CPU 81 activates the mother task (S353) and ends the power-on process. In the mother task, the main board communication task shown in FIG. 66 and the display control task (not shown) for controlling the display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are activated.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task activated in step S351 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 63.

First, the sub CPU 81 executes the timer interrupt initialization process (S360). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the initialization process of the lamp-related data (S361).

Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the timer interrupt wait (S362). In this process, the sub CPU 81 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization until the sub CPU 81 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

As a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization, for example, a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization can be mentioned. In addition, a task group for power interrupt synchronization (not shown), a task group for door monitoring unit communication synchronization (not shown), and the like can be mentioned.

Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the sound control task shown in FIG. 65 (S363). In this process, the task in the next priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group, which is the same group as the lamp control task, is executed.

In the present embodiment, the priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group is basically in the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S363, the sound control task having the next priority of the lamp control task is executed. In step S363, among the sound control tasks shown in FIG. 65, the processes of steps S372 and S373 are executed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the lamp data analysis process (S364), executes the lamp effect execution process (S365), and returns to the process of step S362.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task activated in step S352 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 63.

First, the sub CPU 81 executes an initialization process of sound-related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 20L and 20R (S370). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a task having the next priority in the timer interrupt synchronization task group, which is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S371).

Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the sound data analysis process (S372), performs the sound effect execution process (S373), and executes the process of step S371.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task started in the mother task started in step S353 shown in FIG. 63.

First, the sub CPU 81 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S380) and checks the reception command (S381).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S382). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 returns to the process of step S381.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the received command is a legitimate command, and creates game information from the received command. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 83 (S383). Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the command analysis process shown in FIG. 67 (S384), and returns to the process of step S381.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed in step S384 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 81 executes the effect content determination process (S390) shown in FIG. 68, executes the lamp data determination process (S391), executes the sound data determination process (S392), and registers the determined data. (S393), and the command analysis process is terminated.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process executed in step S390 of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 67.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the initialization command has been received (S400). Here, if it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the initialization command reception processing (S401), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the initialization command reception processing, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the initialization command is set. For example, the effect state is restored or the effect state is initialized based on whether or not the setting is changed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the medal insertion command has been received (S402). If it is determined that the medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the medal insertion command reception processing (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command reception processing, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the medal insertion command is set. For example, production data for outputting a medal insertion sound is set based on whether or not a medal is inserted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the start command has been received (S404). Here, when it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the start command reception time process described later in the description of FIG. 69 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process when the start command is received, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the start command is set. For example, in the AT game, if the internal winning combination is the pushing order combination, the effect data for notifying the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous for the player is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S406). Here, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the reel rotation start command reception processing (S407), and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing at the time of receiving the reel rotation start command, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set. For example, the effect data for outputting the reel rotation start sound is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S408). Here, if it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the reel stop command reception processing (S409), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the reel stop command reception processing, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set. For example, the effect data for outputting the reel stop sound is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lock command has been received (S410). Here, when it is determined that the lock command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the lock command reception time process described later in the description of FIG. 74 (S411), and ends the effect content determination process. In the lock command reception processing, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the lock command is set. For example, effect data for displaying an image according to the type of reel action is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lock command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S412). Here, when it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the winning operation command reception processing described later in the description of FIG. 75 (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. .. In the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command is set. For example, production data for outputting the payout sound according to the number of payouts according to the winning combination is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S414). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the bonus start command reception processing (S415), and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing at the time of receiving the bonus start command, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. In the present embodiment, since the AT game is configured to be relatively more advantageous than the BB game state, the unique effect data is based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command. It may be configured not to set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S416). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the bonus end command reception processing (S417), and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set. In the present embodiment, since the AT game is configured to be relatively more advantageous than the BB game state, the unique effect data is based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command. It may be configured not to set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the no-operation command has been received (S418). Here, if it is determined that the non-operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the non-operation command reception processing (S419), and ends the effect content determination processing.

In the non-operation command reception processing, the effect data may be changed based on the information transmitted as the non-operation command. For example, when the effect data determined in the process at the time of receiving the start command is the effect data requesting the repeated hitting of the MAX bet button 15A, the MAX bet button 15A received as a non-operation command is in the on-edge state or off-edge. The production data is changed based on the state information. On the other hand, in S418, when it is determined that the no-operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process.

<Processing when receiving start command>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a start command reception time process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the AT game is in progress (S430). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT game is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 81 executes the normal game in-game process (S443) described later in the description of FIG. 72, and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT game is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the effect game state is the "AT in progress state" (S431). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is in the AT preparation state described above.

When the sub CPU 81 determines (NO) that the effect game state is not the "AT in progress state" (AT preparation state), the sub CPU 81 sets the AT in progress state transition navigation data according to the internal winning combination (S432). ), The process proceeds to step S438. Here, the navigation data for transitioning to the AT state is data for notifying the stop operation order in which seven medals will be paid out when the "pushing order small winning combination" is determined as the internal winning combination. Further, it is data for notifying the stop operation order so that the stop operation is not performed at the left first stop when the strong chance lip is determined as the internal winning combination. Although not shown, as described above, a lottery for whether or not to notify the additional lock push order is executed, and if the lottery result is the winning, the additional lock push order is determined. It can also be data for notifying the stop operation sequence.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect gaming state is the "AT in progress state" (not in the AT preparation state) (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not it is in the additional state (S433). .. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional state is present (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the process during the additional state (S434) described later in the description of FIG. 70, and proceeds to the process of step S437.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S433 that it is not in the additional state (NO), it determines whether or not the effect gaming state is the pseudo probability change state (“pseudo probability change state 1” or “pseudo probability change state 2”). Judgment (S435). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect game state is not the pseudo-probability change state (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S437, and when it determines that the effect game state is the pseudo-probability change state (YES), FIG. 71 In the description of the above, the pseudo-probability change state processing (S436) described later is executed.

Next, if the navigation data is not set, the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data during the AT game according to the internal winning combination (S437). Here, the navigation data during AT game is basically the same as the navigation data for transitioning to the state during AT, but further, BAR lip 1, BAR lip 2, or fake BAR lip is determined as the internal winning combination. In some cases, it can also be data for notifying the stop operation order of the reverse push (that is, the stop operation order in which the stop operation is performed at the first right stop).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is any of Bell Lips 1 to 4 (S438). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not one of Bell Lips 1 to 4 (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is any of Bell Lips 1 to 4 (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the AT point addition lottery table shown in FIG. 35 and is based on the current point value. Then, the point addition lottery is executed (S439).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the result of the above-mentioned AT point addition lottery is addition (winning) (S440). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the result of the point addition lottery during AT is not addition (winning) (maintenance (non-winning)) (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the result of the AT point addition lottery is addition (winning) (YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the AT point counter (S441) and responds to the AT point counter value. The effect data is set (S442), and the process at the time of receiving the start command is terminated.

Here, the effect data according to the point counter value during AT is the effect data for causing the above-mentioned arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 to emit light according to the value of the current point counter during AT. For example, the above-mentioned movable part 309 is controlled so as to move from the initial position to the effect position when the normal game is changed to the AT game, and the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 become visible accordingly. To. Then, when the AT point counter value is 1, the effect data for displaying the light emitting display unit 325 in one stage is set, and when the AT point counter value is 2, the light emitting display unit 325 is displayed in two stages. When the effect data for AT is set and the point counter value during AT is 3, the effect data for displaying the light emitting display unit 325 in three stages is set, and when the point counter value during AT is 4, the arch cover 324 is opened. The effect data for lighting and displaying is set.
As a result, the player can recognize the acquired AT points during the AT game.

Further, the AT points acquired during the AT game are cumulatively added, and as will be described later in the description of FIG. 75, when the acquired AT points are 4 points, the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less. Even so, the AT game can be performed (continued) again (that is, the right to continue the AT game is granted), but even if the acquired AT points are less than 4 points, the points are acquired. The points during AT can be carried over to at least the next AT game.

The movable component 309 described above moves from the effect position to the initial position when the AT game shifts to the normal game, and the arch cover 324 and the light emitting display unit 325 are controlled so as to be invisible. To. Therefore, in the normal game, it is not possible to recognize the carried-over AT points.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT points are drawn during the AT game, the results are accumulated and stored, and the stored AT points are a predetermined number of points (for example, 4 points). In that case, since the AT game is configured to continue, the longer the AT game continues, the higher the possibility that the AT game will continue. Therefore, the expectation of the addition during the AT game does not become monotonous. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even if the stored AT points are less than the predetermined number of points (for example, 1 to 3 points), the AT points can be carried over to at least the next AT game. However, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after the end of the AT game, which also contributes to the improvement of the operation of the game machine.

In addition, in normal games other than AT games, since the points carried over during AT are not notified, the game is performed with a sense of expectation even for the player who starts the game from the normal game. It becomes possible to make it.

<Processing during additional state>
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an additional state processing executed in step S434 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 69.

First, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the additional state management counter (S450). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the additional state management counter is 10 or more (S451). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition state management counter is 10 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the AT number addition lottery process (S452) at the time of introduction of the addition state, and ends the processing during the addition state. Here, in the AT number addition lottery process at the time of introduction of the additional state, for example, the AT number addition value is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined AT number addition value is added to the AT management difference number counter. Although not shown, when the AT count addition lottery process is executed when the additional state is introduced, a video is displayed to congratulate the transition to the additional state or the continuation of the additional state. The production data is set.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition state management counter is not 10 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 refers to the point addition lottery table in the addition state shown in FIG. 37, and refers to the point addition value based on the internal winning combination. Is determined (S453), and the determined point addition value is added to the point counter in the added state (S454).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the point counter in the added state is 100 or more (S455). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter in the addition state is 100 or more (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the AT number addition lottery table in the addition state shown in FIG. 36, and based on the addition state management counter value, the sub CPU 81 refers to the lottery table. The AT count addition value is determined (S456), the determined AT count addition value is added to the AT management difference number counter (S457), the point counter in the addition state is decremented by 100 (S458), and the addition status management counter is used. An initial value (for example, 12) is set (S459), and the process in the additional state is terminated.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter in the additional state is not 100 or more (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the additional state management counter is 0 (S460). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition state management counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the point counter in the addition state (S461), clears the addition state (S462), and ends the processing in the addition state. To do. Also, when it is determined that the addition state management counter is not 0 (NO), the processing during the addition state is terminated.

<Processing during pseudo-probability change state>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-probability change state process executed in step S436 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the fall waiting flag is on (S470). Here, the fall waiting flag is a flag that is turned on in step S480 described later, and in the control of the main CPU 51, "pseudo-probability change state 1" or "pseudo-probability change state 1" is set as the effect game state. However, in the control of the sub CPU 81, it is a flag for identifying that the pseudo-probability change state has already ended. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall waiting flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S473.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall waiting flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes the bell lip (S471). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not any of the normal rips 1 to 4 and the bell rips 1 to 4 (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination includes the bell lip (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data for the pseudo probability change state fall (S472), and ends the process during the pseudo probability change state. Here, in the navigation data for pseudo-probability change state fall, when the internal winning combination is either normal lip 1 to 4 or bell lip 1 to 4, the bell lip wins a prize in the stop operation order (see FIG. 19). ) Is the data for notifying.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S471 that the internal winning combination does not include the bell lip (NO), the sub CPU 81 moves to the process of step S473. That is, even when the fall waiting flag is on, if the internal winning combination does not include the bell lip, the sub CPU 81 executes a pseudo game or in the process of step S473 described later. Execute an additional lottery for the number of ATs.

Next, the sub CPU 81 executes the AT number addition lottery process (S473) during the pseudo-probability change state. In this pseudo-probability change state AT count addition lottery process, regardless of whether or not the pseudo game is executed, for example, the AT count addition value is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined AT count addition value is used. Add to the AT management difference number counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the pseudo game is executed (S474). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo game is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 moves to the process of step S482.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo game is executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect game state is the "pseudo probability change state 2" (S475). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect gaming state is the "pseudo probability change state 2" (YES), the sub CPU 81 moves to the process of step S482.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S475 that the effect game state is not the "pseudo probability change state 2" (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the fall waiting flag is on (S476). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the fall waiting flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during the pseudo probability change state.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S476 that the fall waiting flag is not on (NO), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the pseudo probability change state management counter (S477), and then whether the pseudo probability change state management counter is 0. It is determined whether or not (S478). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo probability change state management counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S482.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo probability change state management counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the pseudo probability change state end lottery table shown in FIG. 30 (e), and is based on the internal winning combination. , Determine the transition state (S479). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the probability change end is reached, that is, whether or not the probability change end is determined as the transition state (S480). When the sub CPU 81 determines (NO) that the probability change end has not been determined (the probability change continuation has been determined) as the transition state, the process proceeds to step S482.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S480 that the probable change end is determined as the transition state (YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the fall waiting flag (S481).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes a bell lip (S482). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not any of the normal rips 1 to 4 and the bell rips 1 to 4 (see FIG. 17) is determined as the internal winning combination. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination includes the bell lip (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data for maintaining the pseudo probability change state (S483), and ends the process during the pseudo probability change state. Further, the sub CPU 81 also ends the processing during the pseudo probability change state even when it is determined (NO) that the internal winning combination does not include the bell lip. Here, the navigation data for maintaining the pseudo-probability change state notifies the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 19) in which the bell lip does not win when the internal winning combination is either normal lip 1 to 4 or bell lip 1 to 4. It is the data to do.

<Processing during normal game>
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a normal in-game process executed in step S443 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 69.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a definite combination (S490). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a cherry lip, a strong cherry lip, or a strong bell. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is a definite combination (YES), the sub CPU 81 moves to the process of step S493. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is not a fixed combination (NO), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the normal game count counter (S491), and subsequently, whether or not the normal game count counter = the number of ceiling games. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of games played in the normal game has reached the above-mentioned number of ceiling games (digestion of the number of ceiling games). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game count counter = the number of ceiling games (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the AT rushing process (S493) described later in the description of FIG. 73, and proceeds to the process of step S499.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S492 that the normal game count counter = the number of ceiling games is not (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the normal game counter is 1. (S494). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the first game after the end of the AT game. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game count counter is 1 (YES), the sub CPU 81 refers to the mode suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 32 and mode suggestion effect (for example, mode suggestion) based on the current mode. The effect data corresponding to any of the effects 1 to 9) is determined (S495), and the process proceeds to step S499.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the normal game count counter is not 1 (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the 1st place of the normal game count counter is 0 (S496). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the 1st place of the normal game count counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 81 proceeds to the process of step S499.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S496 that the 1st place of the normal game count counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 81 calculates the number of remaining games by the ceiling game number-normal game count counter (S497). With reference to the remaining game number suggestion effect lottery table shown in 33, the remaining game number suggestion effect (for example, effect data corresponding to any of mode suggestion effects 1 to 10) is determined based on the number of remaining games (S498). ). In the present embodiment, in this way, the remaining game number suggestion effect is executed every 10 games in the normal game.

Next, if the effect data has not been set, that is, if the effect data has not been determined, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data according to the internal winning combination (S499), and ends the normal in-game process.

<Processing at AT rush>
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the AT rush processing executed in step S493 of the normal in-game processing shown in FIG. 72 and step S525 of the lock command reception processing shown in FIG. 74.

First, the sub CPU 81 sets the AT rushing effect data (S510). Here, the AT rushing effect data is the effect data for notifying the transition from the normal game to the AT game, and for controlling the movement of the above-mentioned movable part 309 from the initial position to the effect position. This is production data.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the AT game from the next game (S511), and adds 150 to the AT management difference number counter (S512).

Next, the sub CPU 81 executes a mode transition lottery, determines the next mode from the modes A to C (S513), and determines the number of next ceiling games based on the determined mode (S514). ), Clear the normal game count counter (S515), and end the AT rush processing.

In the process of step S512, the sub CPU 81 replaces the process of adding 150 to the AT management difference number counter (giving the basic continuation number described above) to the values of a plurality of AT management difference counters (for example, From 100, 150, or 200), the value of the AT management difference number counter to be added by lottery may be determined, and the process of adding may be executed. With such a configuration, the basic continuation number to be given can be varied, and the continuation number of AT games can be diversified.

<Processing when a lock command is received>
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a lock command reception time process executed in step S411 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the special reel action is executed (S520). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not any of the special reel actions 1 to 4 is executed. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the special reel action is executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the AT count addition value according to the type of the special reel action to the AT management difference number counter (S521), and receives the lock command. End the time processing. Here, for example, when the special reel action 1 is executed, the AT count addition value is 0, and the AT count is not substantially added, but when the special reel action 2 is executed, the AT count is added. When 300 is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter as the addition value and the special reel action 3 is executed, 400 is added to the AT management difference number counter value as the AT number addition value and the special reel When the action 4 is executed, 500 is added to the value of the AT management difference number counter as the AT count addition value.

In the process of step S521, the sub CPU 81 is used for a plurality of AT management instead of the process of adding the value of the AT management difference number counter according to the type of the special reel action (the above-mentioned addition continuation number is given). The value of the AT management difference number counter to be added by lottery may be determined from the values of the difference number counter (for example, 300, 400, 500, or 1000), and the process of adding may be executed. With this configuration, the number of additional continuations given can be varied, and the number of AT games can be continued diversified.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the special reel action is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the reel action 9 or 10 is executed (S522). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel action 9 or 10 is executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets an initial value (for example, 3) in the pseudo probability change state management counter (S523), and ends the lock command reception processing. To do.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S522 that the reel actions 9 or 10 are not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is executed (S524). .. When the sub CPU 81 determines that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is executed (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes the AT entry processing (S525) shown in FIG. 73 and ends the lock command reception processing. ..

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S524 that any of the reel actions 5 to 8 is not executed (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (S526). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the pseudo internal winning combination has been determined (YES), the sub CPU 81 executes an AT number addition lottery based on the pseudo internal winning combination, and adds the lottery result to the AT management difference number counter. Then (S527), the processing at the time of receiving the lock command is terminated.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S526 that the pseudo-internal winning combination has not been determined (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the lock data is executed after all the stops (S528). That is, when the internal winning combination is a strong chance lip, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lock at the end of the game is executed because the stop operation is performed according to the push order for the additional lock.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S528 that the lock data is executed after all stops, it executes the AT count addition lottery process (S529) at the time of lock after all stops, and performs the lock command reception process. finish. The sub CPU 81 also ends the lock command reception process when it determines that the lock data is not executed after all the stops (NO). In this lock-time AT count addition lottery process after all stops, the sub CPU 81 determines, for example, the AT count addition value by lottery (for example, one of 100 to 500 is determined as the AT count addition value), and the lottery result is determined. Add to the AT management difference number counter. It should be noted that the specific benefit given when the lock data is executed after the total stop is not limited to this. For example, as a specific benefit, the sub CPU 81 may be controlled to shift to the above-mentioned additional state. Further, for example, as a specific benefit, the pseudo probability change state may be shifted to the above-mentioned pseudo probability change state under the control of the main CPU 51, and a special value (for example, 10) may be set in the pseudo probability change state management counter.

<Processing when receiving a winning operation command>
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving a winning operation command executed in step S413 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 68.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the AT game is in progress (S540). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT game is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT game is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the additional state (S541). When the sub CPU 81 determines that it is in the additional state (YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command. In the present embodiment, in this way, the subtraction process of the AT management difference number counter (see step S546 described later) is not executed in the added state.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S541 that it is not in the additional state (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the internal winning combination has won a prize other than the BAR lip and the left first stop (S542). Specifically, in the sub CPU 81, BAR lip 1 or BAR lip 2 is determined as the internal winning combination, and by performing the first stop operation on a reel other than the left reel 3L, has the sub CPU 81 won any of the winning replays? Judge whether or not. When the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is a BAR rip and a prize is won other than the left first stop (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the additional state from the next game (S543), and sets the additional state (S543) to the initial value (addition state management counter). For example, 12) is set (S544), and the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command is terminated.

If, in step S542, the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination has not won a prize other than the BAR lip and the first left stop (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the small winning combination has won a prize. (S545). If the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the player has won a small winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 81 manages the difference number calculated from the number of payouts (see FIGS. 14a and 14b) -the number of inserts (for example, 3). Subtract from the difference number counter (S546). In this embodiment, the difference number management in the AT game is realized in this way.

In step S545, the sub CPU 81 may determine whether or not a small winning combination has been won, but whether or not any of the bells has been won. Specifically, one of the "pushing order small role" "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell", and "right middle left bell" is determined as the internal winning role as the internal winning role. If it is determined whether or not it has been won, and if it is determined that one of the bells has been won, "7" is set as the number of payouts regardless of whether or not it was actually paid out, and the process of step S546 is executed. It may be that. That is, the AT management difference number counter may be a counter that is updated by winning the "pushing order small winning combination". With this configuration, for example, in an AT game, between a player who ignores the notified stop operation order and performs a stop operation, and a player who keeps the notified stop operation order and performs a stop operation. Since there will be a difference in the profits that can be obtained, it is possible to increase the tension of the game in the AT game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the sub CPU 81 may execute the process of step S546 by executing the same determination as step S238 of the AT state management process shown in FIG. Specifically, in step S545, the sub CPU 81 determines not whether or not a small winning combination has been won, but whether or not one of the bells has been won, and when it is determined that one of the bells has been won , The process of step S546 may be executed. In the present embodiment, in S239 following step S238 described above, the AT game winning number counter is added by 1, and when the AT game winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (for example, 38), the external signal 1 is turned off. (See FIG. 53). That is, by configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize the condition that the output state of the external signal in the main CPU 51 fluctuates (for example, from on to off) and the condition that the AT game in the sub CPU 51 ends. it can. In this case, it is desirable to synchronize the condition for starting the AT game in the sub CPU 51 with the condition for the output state of the external signal in the main CPU 51 to fluctuate (for example, from off to on).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the AT management difference number counter is 0 or less (S547). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT management difference number counter is not 0 or less (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT management difference number counter is 0 or less (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the AT point counter is 4 or more (S548).

When the sub CPU 81 determines that the AT point counter is 4 or more (YES), the AT management difference number counter is added by 150 (S549), the AT point counter is subtracted by 4 (S550), and a prize is won. Terminates processing when an operation command is received. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the point counter during AT is not 4 or more (NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the normal game from the next game, sets the determined mode and the number of ceiling games (S551), and wins a prize. Terminates processing when an operation command is received. In the present embodiment, in this way, the AT game is continued based on the points during AT.

The determination of whether or not the point counter during AT is 4 or more is not limited to that executed at the end of the AT game. For example, in the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 69, a stock counter indicating that one set of AT games is continued based on the fact that the point counter during AT becomes 4, (that is, the right to continue the AT game). Is added by 1, and at the end of the AT game, it is determined whether or not the stock counter is 1 or more, and if the stock counter is 1 or more, control is performed to continue one set of the AT game. Good. In this case, instead of the effect data for lighting and displaying the arch cover 324 described above, or together with this, the effect data for notifying that one set of the AT game continues is set, and the AT game is performed during the AT game. May notify that one set continues.

[Other Embodiments of Pachislot Machine]
In the present embodiment, special reel actions 1 to 4, reel actions 1 to 14, or a pseudo game are adopted as the reel effect (effect according to the symbol variation mode), but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, other embodiments can be adopted as the reel effect (effect according to the pattern variation mode). Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79, a reel effect (effect according to a symbol variation mode) according to another embodiment will be described. In the description of FIGS. 76 to 79, the description of the content that overlaps with the content already described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 75 is omitted.

<Lock lottery processing>
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a lock lottery process executed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42 in another embodiment.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination includes the cherry lip A (S560). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not either a cherry lip or a strong cherry lip (see FIG. 17) has been determined as the internal winning combination. When the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination does not include the cherry lip A (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock lottery process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination includes the cherry lip A (YES), the main CPU 51 sets a special reel action (S561), turns on the special control flag (S562), and ends the lock lottery process. To do. In step S561, the condition for setting the special reel action is not limited to the case where it is determined that the internal winning combination includes the cherry lip A. For example, whether or not to execute the special reel action is simply determined. A lottery may be made and a decision may be made based on the lottery result.

<Lock execution process at the start of the game>
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a game start lock execution process executed in step S19 of the main control process shown in FIG. 42 in another embodiment.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the special reel action has been determined (S565). When the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action has not been determined (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lock execution process at the start of the game. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the special reel action has been determined (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the left stop button is on (S565). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is pressed by the player (pseudo stop operation) and the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is on. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left stop button is not on (OFF), the main CPU 51 ends the lock execution process at the start of the game (NO). Here, for example, in the special reel action, each reel starts a pseudo rotation by the forward rotation in the same manner as the normal rotation (that is, at the same or substantially the same rotation speed as the rotation speed in the normal rotation), and is used for the effect described later. When the value of the timer becomes 0, each reel starts normal rotation as it is, which is a symbol variation mode.

When the main CPU 51 determines in step S566 that the left stop button is on (YES), the main CPU 51 sets an effect timer according to the pseudo stop start position (S567), and ends the game start lock execution process. To do. Here, the pseudo stop start position indicates a symbol position (for example, symbol position data located in the middle stage of the left reel 3L) when the left stop button 17L is operated during execution of the special reel action.

In addition, setting the effect timer according to the pseudo stop start position means that the pseudo stop start position is the number of symbols when viewed from the position where the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 3L (symbol position data are 12 and 17). Indicates that the effect timer is set according to whether the distance is set. For example, when the value of the effect timer for one symbol is set to "17" (about 0.019 seconds), the position where the "cherry" symbol stops and the pseudo stop start position are one symbol in the middle stage of the left reel 3L. If they are separated, "17" (about 0.019 seconds) is set as the value of the effect timer, and the position where the "cherry" symbol stops and the pseudo stop start position are 14 symbols in the middle of the left reel 3L. If they are far apart, "238 (17 × 14)" (about 0.266 seconds) is set as the value of the effect timer. Here, assuming that the value of the pulse counter required to move one symbol (the symbol counter is incremented by 1) is "17", that is, in the special reel action, the value of the effect timer is "17". A value corresponding to an integral multiple of the time required to move one symbol is set according to how many symbols the pseudo stop start position is separated from the position where the "cherry" symbol stops.

In other embodiments, the value of the effect timer is set according to how many symbols the pseudo stop start position is separated from the position where the "cherry" symbol stops, but this is limited to this. The value of the effect timer may be set according to the lottery. Specifically, the same lottery value is assigned to the symbol position data "0" to "19" to perform lottery (for example, the lottery value "12" is assigned to each symbol position data, and 12 / One symbol position data is determined by lottery with a probability of 256. Further, the lottery value "16", which is a fraction of the lottery value when the lottery value "12" is assigned to each symbol position data, is again a symbol. The position data will be re-lottered), and the value of the effect timer according to the determined symbol position data (for example, the pseudo stop start position when viewed from the symbol position according to the symbol position data determined as a result of the lottery). The value of the effect timer at which the execution of the lock at the start of the game is terminated) may be set according to how many symbols are separated. In addition, the lottery of the symbol position at which the execution of the lock at the start of the game ends may be performed at the start operation.

Further, in other embodiments, the left reel 3L and the left stop button 17L are described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left reel 3L and the left stop button 17L are replaced with the middle one. The same processing may be executed on the reel 3C and the middle stop button 17R, or the right reel 3L and the right stop button 17R, or the same processing may be executed on all of them.

<Input port check process>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 51 shown in FIG. 55. Since the processes of steps S570 to S573 in FIG. 78 are the same as the processes of steps S330 to S333 in FIG. 56, the description thereof will be omitted.

The main CPU 51 determines whether or not the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (S574). When the special control flag is on and the effect timer is determined to be non-zero (NO), the input port check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 subsequently determines whether or not the left stop button is on (S575). That is, the main CPU 51 turns on the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L based on the player pressing the left stop button 17L during the execution of the special reel action, and at the end of the special reel action. Based on the fact that the pressing operation is continued, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L remains in the ON state. When the main CPU 51 determines that the left stop button is not on (off) (NO), the main CPU 51 ends the input port check process.

If the main CPU 51 determines in step S575 that the left stop button is on (YES), the main CPU 51 requests the output of a special on-edge signal (S576), and ends the input port check process. Here, requesting the output of the special on-edge signal means that the on-edge signal from the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L is pseudo-output even when the left stop button 3L is still pressed. Is indicated, or the process of turning off the on-edge signal from the stop switch 17S corresponding to the left stop button 17L and then turning it on again is executed.

In the present embodiment, normally, after the process of step S20 of FIG. 42, the stop operation to each reel is permitted based on the fact that each reel has a constant speed rotation, and then the input port is checked. In the process, the execution of the stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is started based on the on-edge information stored as the input data of the input port assigned to the stop switch 17S. On the other hand, in other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, the process of step S576 is performed so that the stop switch 17S is assigned even if the stop button is still pressed. It is configured to store on-edge information as input data for the input port. Here, even if the stop button is still pressed, the mode in which the on-edge information is stored as the input data of the input port assigned to the stop switch 17S is not limited to this. For example, at the timing when the stop operation to each reel is permitted, it is always monitored whether or not the stop switch 17S is on, and if it is on, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is executed. You may want to start. In this case, the processing of steps S574 to S576 becomes unnecessary.

As described above, in other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, each reel starts pseudo-rotation by forward rotation, and when the player performs the pseudo-stop operation, a specific symbol position (for example, , The effect timer is set based on the "cherry" symbol stop in the middle stage) and the pseudo stop start position (for example, the symbol position located in the middle stage when the pseudo stop operation is performed). When the value of the effect timer becomes 0, a reel stop request signal (for example, a special on-edge signal) is output even when the player keeps pressing the stop button, and the reel is at a specific symbol position. Will stop.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the other embodiment, the reel effect can be used to give the player the impression that the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed, so that the interest in the stop operation is remarkably enhanced. It is possible to improve.

Further, the combination of the symbols related to Cherry Lip A is "Cherry-ANY-ANY", but the player can easily hold down the left stop button 17L during the special reel action. The "cherry" symbol can be stopped in the middle of the left reel 3L. That is, since it is possible to easily detect that a specific combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed combination) has been established, it is possible to significantly improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the internal winning combination is a cherry lip or a strong cherry lip, even if the combination of symbols related to cherry lip A is not stopped and displayed, the combination of symbols related to other replays is always stopped and displayed. (See FIGS. 17 and 19), so that the player does not suffer any particular disadvantage. Therefore, even if the "cherry" symbol can be easily stopped in the middle of the left reel 3L, it does not impair the fairness of the game.

<Continued stop operation suggestion effect>
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a stop operation continuation suggestion effect according to another embodiment. Here, the stop operation continuation suggestion effect is, for example, a case where a special reel action is determined in the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 49, and lock command data including that fact is generated. In the communication data transmission process stored in the communication data storage area and shown in FIG. 57, when the lock command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42, the sub CPU 81 is shown an effect of being executed by control.

As shown in FIG. 79, for example, when a special reel action is executed, the sub CPU 81 controls the liquid crystal display device 11 so that an image "hold down the left stop button!" Is displayed. After that, when the left stop button 3L is pseudo-stopped and the effect timer becomes 0 while the left stop button 3L is still pressed, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L. ..

As described above, in other embodiments, when the special reel action is executed, the notification that the stop button should be continuously pressed based on the pseudo stop operation is notified, so that the special reel action is used. Based on this, it is possible to surely enjoy the effect that can give the player the impression that the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed. In addition, when the establishment of a specific combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed combination) is a condition for executing the special reel action, the player is notified that the specific combination (for example, the above-mentioned fixed combination) has been established. You can definitely enjoy it.

As described above, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination. (Internal lottery process), symbol variation start control means (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) that starts variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means. The symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the symbol variation and the symbol variation stop control means stop the symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means. And, based on the profit-giving means (for example, the medal payout process by the main CPU 51) that grants the profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols and the predetermined start condition, until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. An advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU81) that controls an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) that is advantageous for the player, and a notification means (for example, liquid crystal) that executes notification of a plurality of types of information to the player. The display device 11, the lamp group 21, the speakers 20L, 20R) and the notification control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) that controls the notification executed by the notification means, and the advantageous gaming state control means is at least. The notification control means is set to the predetermined start condition that a predetermined number of games have been played in a normal game state different from the advantageous game state (for example, the number of ceiling games has been exhausted in the normal game). Is specified based on the number of games (for example, the number of remaining games) up to the predetermined number of games each time a specific number of games (for example, 10 games) is played in the normal game state. One specific notification data is determined from the notification data (for example, effect data corresponding to the remaining game number suggestion effects 1 to 10), and the notification according to the determined specific notification data is executed by the notification means, and the notification is performed. When the specific notification data is determined by the control means, the specific notification data is determined at different determination ratios for each range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games (for example, the remaining game shown in FIG. 33). The game machine is characterized in that the production data corresponding to the number of remaining games suggestion production is determined by referring to the number suggestion production lottery table.

According to this game machine, in a normal game state (for example, a normal game), every time a game of a specific number of games is performed, a notification corresponding to the specific notification data (for example, a suggestion effect of the number of remaining games) is executed. As a result, it is possible to add a new game property of estimating the number of remaining games until the transition to the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) is possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and reduce the decrease in the operation of the game machine.

Further, according to this game machine, as the number of games played in the normal game state (for example, the normal game) increases, the notification corresponding to a large amount of specific notification data (for example, the remaining game number suggestion effect) is executed. Therefore, a player who has a large number of games can more accurately grasp the number of remaining games, so that the operation of the game machine can be promoted.

Further, according to this game machine, in estimating the number of remaining games until it becomes possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), notification according to one specific notification data (for example, the number of remaining games) In some cases, it can be estimated by executing the suggestion effect), and in other cases, it can be estimated by executing the notification according to the specific notification data multiple times (for example, the suggestion effect of the number of remaining games). (For example, the effect of suggesting the number of remaining games) can be significantly improved.

Further, the plurality of specific notification data include at least the first specific notification data (for example, production data corresponding to any of the remaining game number suggestion effects 1 to 3) and the second specific notification data (for example, the remaining games). Production data corresponding to the number suggestion effect 4), third specific notification data (for example, effect data corresponding to the remaining game number suggestion effect 5), and fourth specific notification data (for example, remaining game number suggestion effect 8 to 10). When the range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range (for example, the number of remaining games is within 240 games), the notification control means includes the effect data corresponding to any of the above. Only, the first specific notification data is determined with a predetermined probability, and the range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range, and the first range (for example, the number of remaining games) Is in the range of 101 to 240 games, or the number of remaining games is in the range of 31 to 50 games), and the second specific notification data is determined with a first probability (for example, a probability of 2000/32768). , A second probability lower than the first probability (for example, when the number of remaining games is in the range of 51 to 100 games or the number of remaining games is in the range of 11 to 30 games). , 100/32768), and when the range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined range and is within the second range. In addition, the third specific notification data is determined with the first probability, and the third specific notification data is determined with the second probability when it is in the first range, and the predetermined When the range of the number of games up to the number of games is outside the predetermined range (for example, the number of remaining games is 241 games or more), the second probability is lower than the first probability and higher than the second probability. The second specific notification data or the third specific notification data is determined with a probability of 3 (for example, a probability of 300/32768), and the range of the number of games up to the predetermined number of games is in any range. Even if there is, a fourth probability higher than the predetermined probability and the first probability (for example, 10000/32768 probability, 9300/32768 probability, 9000/32768 probability, 10522/32768 probability, or 10524. A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth specific notification data is determined with a probability of / 32768).

According to this game machine, by complicating the determination of the specific notification data, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in estimating the number of remaining games until the transition to the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) is possible. However, the playability can be made more diverse.

A profit is given according to a combination of a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and a symbol displayed on the symbol display means. A game machine provided with profit-giving means (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) and notification means for notifying the player of information (for example, liquid crystal display device 11, lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R). Therefore, based on the player's start operation (for example, operation to the start lever 16), the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining the internal winning combination, and the start operation. The symbol variation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the player's stop operation (for example, stop button 17L, Based on the operation to 17C and 17R), a symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and a predetermined shift. Based on the fact that the conditions are met (for example, "strong chance lip" is determined as the internal winning role, and the combination of either "special lip A1-6" or "special lip B" symbols is stopped). , The gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state") to the first gaming state (for example, "main CZ state 1"), and in the first gaming state, during a specific number of games (for example, "for example"). , 8 games), the gaming state is shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (for example, "AT in progress"), and the specific transition condition is satisfied. If is not established, the game state transition control means (for example, the state management process by the main CPU 51) for shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the first gaming state, the above-mentioned The main effect means (for example, the reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) that performs the effect according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the effect by the reel actions 1 to 8), and the leading role in the first game state. A main control means including a lock execution means (for example, a lock execution process at the start of a game by the main CPU 51) that executes a lock that invalidates the game operation by the player according to the effect of the symbol variation mode performed by the output means. (For example, main CPU 51) and the front When the game state is controlled to the second game state by the game state transition control means, the sub-effect means (for example, the sub CPU 81) notifies the information of the advantageous stop operation related to the addition of the game medium by the notification means. A sub-control means (for example, a sub CPU81) including a start command reception process) is provided, and the specific transition condition is produced by the main effect means in a specific symbol variation mode (for example, a reel action). A gaming machine characterized in that 5 to 8 are executed).

According to this game machine, by giving a privilege (for example, shifting to an AT game) according to the type of the effect (for example, reel action) according to the symbol variation mode executed at the time of executing the lock, in particular, the lock It is possible to significantly improve the expectation in the chance zone state (for example, "main CZ state 1") that is easy to execute.

Further, in the first game state, the main effect means determines the symbol variation mode based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means for each game (for example, during a normal game by the main CPU 51). The reel action in the lottery process is determined), and the game state transition control means is a case where the specific symbol variation mode (for example, reel actions 5 to 8) is not determined by the main effect means, and the predetermined symbol variation When the aspect (for example, reel action 3 or 4) is determined, the gaming state is shifted to the high-probability first gaming state (for example, "main CZ state 2"), and the main effect means is the high-probability first gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that, in one gaming state, the specific symbol variation mode is determined with a higher probability than in the first gaming state (for example, lottery by a reel action lottery table for a main CZ state by a main CPU 51).

According to this game machine, it is possible to diversify the mode of the effect (for example, reel action) by the symbol variation mode to improve the interest of the game, and the effect by the symbol variation mode to which the privilege is given (for example). For example, even when the reel actions 5 to 8) at which the AT game is started are not determined, in the chance zone state (for example, "main CZ state 1" or "main CZ state 2") in which the lock is likely to be executed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in expectations.

In addition, the effect of the symbol variation mode changes the symbol stepwise in a mode different from the symbol variation started by the symbol variation start control means (for example, reverse rotation) (for example, each reel is changed from one stage to one stage). It is changed in 6 steps), and the step of changing the symbol is different between the effect of the specific symbol variation mode and the effect of the predetermined symbol variation mode (for example, 5 steps of reel actions 5 and 7, reel). The game machine is characterized in that each reel is changed in 6 steps in actions 6 and 8, whereas each reel is changed in 3 steps in reel action 3 and 4 steps in reel action 4).

According to this game machine, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation of the player when the effect (for example, reel action) is executed by the symbol variation mode, and the degree of advantage to the player is intuitive. Can be grasped by.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 51) that start the symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the symbol fluctuation stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. And, based on the profit-giving means (for example, the medal payout process by the main CPU 51) that grants the profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols and the predetermined start condition, until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine including an advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) that controls an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) that is advantageous for the player, and the internal winning combination is determined in the advantageous game state. Based on the determination of a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, any of Bell Lips 1 to 4) by the means, the point number giving means for giving the number of points (for example, the processing at the time of receiving the start command by the sub CPU 81), The point number storage means (for example, a point counter during AT) that cumulatively stores the number of points given by the point number giving means and the number of points stored by the point number storage means are a predetermined number (for example, "4"). Based on the fact that, the continuation right granting means for granting the right to continue the advantageous gaming state (for example, the processing of S549 in the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command controlled by the sub CPU 81) and the continuation right granting means Based on the right to continue the advantageous gaming state, the point number updating means for subtracting the predetermined number from the number of points stored by the point number storage means (for example, a winning operation command controlled by the sub CPU 81). (Processing of S550 in the processing at the time of reception), and the advantageous game state control means continues when the predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, the difference number counter for AT management becomes 0 or less). If the right to continue the advantageous gaming state is granted by the right-granting means, the advantageous gaming letter is until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied again. When the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the number of points less than the predetermined number is stored, the advantageous game state control means at least the next time the point number storage means controls the state. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of stored points is carried over until it is controlled to an advantageous gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, any of Bell Lips 1 to 4) is determined during an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), points (for example, points during AT) are given. Since the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) is configured to continue when the number of points given and stored reaches a predetermined number of points (for example, 4 points), the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) is in progress. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without the expectation of the addition being monotonous.

Further, according to this game machine, even if the stored points (for example, points during AT) are less than a predetermined number of points (for example, 1 to 3 points), the points are at least the next advantageous game state. Since it is configured so that it can be carried over to (for example, AT game), it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game immediately after the end of the advantageous game state, which also contributes to the improvement of the operation of the game machine. Become.

Further, in the advantageous gaming state, the point number notification means (for example, the arch cover 324 controlled by the sub CPU 81 and the light emitting display unit 325) for notifying the number of points stored in the point number storage means is further provided. When the number of points is carried over by the point number storage means, the point number notification means does not notify the point number in a game state other than the advantageous game state (for example, a normal game) (for example, a sub). A gaming machine characterized in that the movable parts 309 are moved from the effect position to the initial position under the control of the CPU 81).

According to this gaming machine, in a gaming state (for example, a normal game) other than an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), the carried-over points (for example, points during AT) are not notified. It is possible for a player who starts a game from a normal game to play the game with a sense of expectation.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a normal game control means (for example, the main CPU 51 and) that controls the progress of the normal game. Sub CPU81), normal game operation detecting means (for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S) for detecting normal game operation by a player in the normal game, and pseudo game control for controlling the progress of pseudo game. Means (for example, main CPU 51 and sub CPU 81), pseudo game operation detecting means for detecting a pseudo game operation by a player in the pseudo game, for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S), and predetermined start conditions. Is provided, and the advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) for controlling the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) which is advantageous for the player for a predetermined number of games is provided. The game operation detecting means can detect at least a start operation (for example, an operation to the start lever 16) and a stop operation (for example, an operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) as the normal game operation, and is said to be normal. The game control means is a symbol variation start means (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) that starts the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the detection of the start operation. Based on the detection of the start operation, the internal winning combination determining means for determining the internal winning combination (for example, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation are detected. A symbol variation stopping means (for example, a reel stop control process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the symbol variation stop means stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit granting means (for example, the medal payout process by the main CPU 51) that grants a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols. In the advantageous game state, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the normal game addition determining means (for example, controlled by the sub CPU 81) determines whether or not to add the predetermined number of games. (Processing of S474 in the processing during the pseudo-probability change state) and the normal in the advantageous gaming state. The lock determination means (for example, the lottery process during the pseudo-probability change state by the main CPU 51) for determining whether or not to execute the lock that invalidates the game operation for a predetermined period, and the lock determination means determine the execution of the lock. Based on this, the lock execution means for executing the lock (for example, the lock execution process at the start of the game by the main CPU 51) is provided, and the pseudo game operation detection means executes the lock by the lock execution means. When this is the case, the pseudo game operation (for example, operation to the MAX bet button 15A, operation to the start lever 16, operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the pseudo game control means The pseudo-game number determination means (for example, the lottery process during the pseudo-probability change state by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo-game number determination means for determining the number of pseudo games when the lock is executed once by the lock execution means. Pseudo-internal winning combination determining means for determining a pseudo-internal winning combination based on the detection of the pseudo-game operation when the determined pseudo-game number is not 0 (for example, the pseudo-game number counter is not 0) For example, whether or not to add the predetermined number of games based on the lock execution process at the start of the game by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo-internal winning combination determined by the pseudo-internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state. The pseudo-game addition determination means (for example, the process of S527 in the lock command reception processing under the control of the sub CPU 81) is provided, and the pseudo-game number determination means determines a plurality of pseudo-games (for example). , Pseudo-game count determination of the pseudo-game count based on the lottery table) A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a normal game control means (for example, the main CPU 51 and) that controls the progress of the normal game. Sub CPU81), normal game operation detecting means (for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S) for detecting normal game operation by a player in the normal game, and pseudo game control for controlling the progress of pseudo game. Means (for example, main CPU 51 and sub CPU 81), pseudo game operation detecting means for detecting a pseudo game operation by a player in the pseudo game, for example, bet switch 15S, start switch 16S, stop switch 17S), and predetermined start conditions. Is provided, and the advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) for controlling the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) which is advantageous for the player for a predetermined number of games is provided. The game operation detecting means can detect at least a start operation (for example, an operation to the start lever 16) and a stop operation (for example, an operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) as the normal game operation, and is said to be normal. The game control means is a symbol variation start means (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) that starts the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the detection of the start operation. Based on the detection of the start operation, the internal winning combination determining means for determining the internal winning combination (for example, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation are detected. A symbol variation stopping means (for example, a reel stop control process and a reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the symbol variation stop means stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit granting means (for example, the medal payout process by the main CPU 51) that grants a profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols. In the advantageous game state, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the normal game addition determining means (for example, controlled by the sub CPU 81) determines whether or not to add the predetermined number of games. (Processing of S474 in the processing during the pseudo-probability change state) and the normal in the advantageous gaming state. The lock determination means (for example, the lottery process during the pseudo-probability change state by the main CPU 51) for determining whether or not to execute the lock that invalidates the game operation for a predetermined period, and the lock determination means determine the execution of the lock. Based on this, the lock executing means for executing the lock (for example, the lock execution process at the start of the game by the main CPU 51) is provided, and the pseudo game operation detecting means executes the lock by the lock executing means. When this is the case, the pseudo game operation (for example, operation to the MAX bet button 15A, operation to the start lever 16, operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) can be detected, and the pseudo game control means The pseudo-game number determination means (for example, the lottery process during the pseudo-probability change state by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo-game number determination means for determining the number of pseudo games when the lock is executed once by the lock execution means. Pseudo-internal winning combination determining means for determining a pseudo-internal winning combination based on the detection of the pseudo-game operation when the determined pseudo-game number is not 0 (for example, the pseudo-game number counter is not 0) For example, whether or not to add the predetermined number of games based on the lock execution process at the start of the game by the main CPU 51) and the pseudo-internal winning combination determined by the pseudo-internal winning combination determining means in the advantageous gaming state. From the pseudo-game addition determination means (for example, the processing of S527 in the lock command reception processing under the control of the sub CPU 81), the first mode (for example, "pseudo-probability change state 1"), and the first mode. A second mode (for example, "pseudo-probability change state 2") in which the number of pseudo-games determined by the pseudo-game number determination means is relatively large, is set to a predetermined transition condition (for example, a high-probability transition lottery). The mode transition means for shifting based on (whether or not) is provided, and the pseudo-game number determination means always shifts to the second mode a plurality of times when the mode shift means shifts to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized in determining the number of pseudo games.

Further, the pseudo game operation detecting means detects at least a pseudo start operation (for example, an operation on the start lever 16) and a pseudo stop operation (for example, an operation on the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) as the pseudo game operation. It is possible, and the pseudo-internal winning combination determining means determines the pseudo-internal winning combination based on the detection of the pseudo-start operation, and the pseudo-game control means determines that the pseudo-operation is detected. Based on this, the pseudo symbol variation start means (for example, the pseudo game process and the reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) that pseudo-starts the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the pseudo stop operation are detected. Based on this, the pseudo symbol fluctuation stopping means (for example, the main CPU 51) that pseudo-stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means according to the pseudo internal winning combination determined by the pseudo internal winning combination determining means. Pseudo-game processing and reel production control processing), which is a game machine characterized by further.

According to this game machine, for example, during the pseudo-probability change state, not only the opportunity of the additional lottery of the number of advantageous game states based on the internal winning combination (for example, the number of ATs) but also the advantageous gaming state based on the pseudo internal winning combination Since an opportunity for an additional lottery for the number of times (for example, the number of ATs) is also given, it is possible to expect multiple additional lottery during one unit game, and to improve the interest of the game related to the addition. Can be done.

Further, according to this game machine, by using the pseudo game, for example, it is possible to generate a plurality of lottery times in a time shorter than the specified time specified in the game machine. Therefore, for example, a pseudo probability change state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the additional lottery state which is advantageous to the player.

Further, according to this game machine, in the second mode (for example, "pseudo-probability change state 2"), when the pseudo-game is executed, the number of pseudo-games is always a plurality of times (for example, two or more times). Since it is determined, it is possible to enjoy the opportunity of additional lottery for the number of advantageous gaming states (for example, the number of ATs) based on the pseudo-internal winning combination, which is advantageous for the player in the pseudo-probability changing state, for example. It is possible to diversify the additional lottery state.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 51) that determines an internal winning combination. (Internal lottery process), symbol variation start control means (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) that starts variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means. The symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the symbol variation and the symbol variation stop control means stop the symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means. And, based on the profit-giving means (for example, the medal payout process by the main CPU 51) that grants the profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols and the predetermined start condition are satisfied, the player during the predetermined number of games. Advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU81) that controls an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) that is advantageous to the player, and game number management means (for example, sub) that manages the predetermined number of games in the advantageous game state. Management of the difference number counter for AT management by the CPU 81 and the fact that a specific start condition is satisfied in the advantageous gaming state (for example, "BAR lip 1" or "BAR lip 2" is determined as an internal winning combination, left By performing the first stop operation on reels other than 3L, a specific end condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining 10 games) based on winning one of the winning replays and digesting the additional state for 2 games). The additional game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 81) that controls the additional game state (for example, the additional state), which is the game state in which the predetermined number of games is added, until the additional game state (for example, the additional state continues). The game number management means does not update the predetermined number of games in the additional game state (for example, the processing of S541 in the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command controlled by the sub CPU 81), and the addition is performed. The game state control means includes a point number determining means (for example, processing during the additional state by the sub CPU 81) that determines the number of points by lottery for each game until the specific end condition is satisfied in the additional game state. A point number storage means (for example, a point counter in an additional state) that cumulatively stores the number of points determined by the point number determination means, and the point number storage means. When a predetermined number (for example, "100") or more of points is stored, the number of additional games to be added to the predetermined number of games is determined by the means for determining the number of additional games (for example, the processing during the additional state by the sub CPU 81). ), And when the predetermined number or more of points are stored by the point number storage means and the specific end condition is satisfied, the additional game is performed until the specific end condition is satisfied again. In the case where the additional game state continuation means for continuing the state (for example, the processing during the additional state by the sub CPU 81) and the point number storage means store the number of points exceeding the predetermined number, the specific end condition is When it is established, in the additional game state continued by the additional game state continuation means, the number of points carry-over means (for example, S458 in the process during the additional state controlled by the sub CPU 81) is carried over the number of points exceeding the predetermined number. Processing) and a gaming machine characterized by including.

According to this gaming machine, the additional gaming state (for example, the additional state) also functions as a state for increasing the number of advantageous gaming states (for example, the number of ATs), and also functions as a state for increasing medals, for example. Therefore, even if the number of advantageous gaming states cannot be increased in the additional gaming state, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game by ensuring that the player enjoys the benefit of increasing medals. it can. In addition, when the additional state continues, the points to be cumulatively added during the additional state (for example, the points during the additional state) can be carried over, so that the lottery result during the additional state is not wasted. It is possible to further improve the expectation of lottery during the additional state.

Further, the specific end condition is a specific game in which the number of points of the predetermined number or more is stored by the point number storage means, or the number of points of the predetermined number or more is not stored by the point number storage means. The number of games has been played, and the additional game number determination means is the number of times in the additional game state that the game in which the predetermined number or more of points are stored by the point number storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of additional games is determined based on whether or not the game is (for example, an additional state management counter value).

According to this game machine, it is possible to prevent the additional lottery from becoming monotonous in the additional game state (for example, the additional state), and to maintain the interest of the game even when the additional game state is repeatedly controlled. Can be done.

Profit is given according to the combination of the symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. A gaming machine including a profit-giving means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) and a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, a speaker 20L, 20R) for notifying a player of information. Therefore, based on the start operation of the player (for example, the operation to the start lever 16), the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining the internal winning combination, and the start operation. Then, the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the player's stop operation (for example, the stop button 17L, Based on the operation to 17C and 17R), the symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the internal winning. Based on the fact that a specific internal winning combination (for example, "cherry lip", "strong cherry lip" or "strong bell") is determined by the combination determining means, the game state from the next game is changed to the normal game state (for example, for example). The advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU81) that shifts from the normal game) to the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) that is advantageous for the player, and the specific internal winning combination are the first specific internal winning combination. (For example, "strong cherry lip") and a second specific internal winning combination (for example, "cherry lip") are included, and the first specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. In the case, and when the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the result of the predetermined lottery is the winning (for example, any of the special reel actions 2 to 4). (If determined), in the next game, an effect according to the first symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means (for example, execution of any of the special reel actions 2 to 4) is performed, and the internal winning combination determination means is used. When the second specific internal winning combination is determined and the result of the predetermined lottery is non-winning (for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined), the symbol display means is used in the next game. Production by the displayed second symbol variation mode (for example, special reel action 1) Based on the determination of the specific internal winning combination by the main effect means (for example, the reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) and the internal winning combination determining means, the basic continuation in the advantageous gaming state. According to the first symbol variation mode by the basic continuation number assigning means (for example, AT entry processing by the sub CPU 81) for assigning the number of times (for example, adding 150 to the AT management difference number counter) and the main effect means. A gaming machine comprising: an additional continuation number giving means (for example, processing at the time of receiving a lock command by a sub CPU 81) that grants an additional continuation number in the advantageous gaming state based on the effect.

Profit is given according to the combination of the symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. A gaming machine including a profit-giving means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) and a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a lamp group 21, a speaker 20L, 20R) for notifying a player of information. Therefore, based on the start operation of the player (for example, the operation to the start lever 16), the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining the internal winning combination, and the start operation. Then, the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the player's stop operation (for example, the stop button 17L, Based on the operation to 17C and 17R), the symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the internal winning. Based on the fact that a specific internal winning combination (for example, "cherry lip", "strong cherry lip" or "strong bell") is determined by the combination determining means, the game state from the next game is changed to the normal game state (for example, for example). The advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU81) that shifts from the normal game) to the advantageous game state (for example, AT game) that is advantageous for the player, and the specific internal winning combination are the first specific internal winning combination. (For example, "strong cherry lip") and a second specific internal winning combination (for example, "cherry lip") are included, and the first specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. In the case, and when the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the result of the predetermined lottery is the winning (for example, any of the special reel actions 2 to 4). (If determined), in the next game, an effect according to the first symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means (for example, execution of any of the special reel actions 2 to 4) is performed, and the internal winning combination determination means is used. When the second specific internal winning combination is determined and the result of the predetermined lottery is non-winning (for example, when the special reel action 1 is determined), the symbol display means is used in the next game. Production by the displayed second symbol variation mode (for example, special reel action 1) (For example, the reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) and the main effect means perform the effect according to the first symbol variation mode or the effect according to the second symbol variation mode. Based on this, the basic continuation number granting means (for example, the sub CPU 81) that grants the basic continuation number in the advantageous gaming state (for example, adding 150, 300, 400, or 500 to the AT management difference number counter) and the leading role. Based on the effect of the first symbol variation mode being performed by the issuing means, the addition continuation number giving means (for example, the sub CPU 81) for giving the addition continuation number in the advantageous gaming state is provided, and the addition continuation is provided. The number-of-times giving means is a gaming machine characterized by granting the right to continue the advantageous gaming state.

According to this game machine, the winning of the fixed winning combination is not limited to merely generating an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game), but depends on the symbol variation mode executed in the next game based on the winning of the fixed winning combination. When an effect (for example, a special reel action) is performed and an effect (for example, any of the special reel actions 2 to 4) is performed according to the first symbol variation mode, the number of additional continuations added to the basic number of continuations is added. Since the reels are configured to be added, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation not only in the game in which the winning combination is won or won, but also in the next game.

Further, in the symbol variation stop control means, when the first specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, each reel). When the second specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stopping operation is performed at the predetermined timing. A gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation of symbols is stopped so that at least a part of the symbols constituting the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means is different.

According to this game machine, a player who wants to quickly recognize the type of a fixed combination can press the reels at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed), thereby depending on the symbol variation mode. It will be possible to recognize the type before the production is performed. On the other hand, a player who wants to recognize whether or not the addition is successful (that is, whether or not the number of continuation additions is given) by the production by the pattern variation mode can continue the expectation more by not performing the above-mentioned pressing. You can play games. That is, since it is possible to notify whether or not the addition is successful depending on the notification form and timing desired by the player, it is possible to perform notification according to the player's preference regarding the addition notification.

Further, the basic continuation number giving means determines and grants the basic continuation number of one of the plurality of basic continuation times, and the addition continuation number giving means is one of the plurality of addition continuation times. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of continuations of addition is determined and given.

According to this gaming machine, the basic continuation number and the addition continuation number to be given can be varied, and the continuation number of the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) can be diversified.

A profit is given according to a combination of a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and a symbol displayed on the symbol display means. A game machine provided with profit-giving means (for example, medal payout processing by the main CPU 51) and notification means for notifying the player of information (for example, liquid crystal display device 11, lamp group 21, speakers 20L, 20R). Based on the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining the internal winning combination based on the player's start operation (for example, the operation to the start lever 16) and the start operation. The symbol variation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the player's stop operation (for example, stop button 17L, Based on the operation to 17C and 17R), the symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the internal winning. A specific internal winning combination (for example, "strong chance lip") is determined by the combination determining means, and the stop operation is performed in a specific order (for example, the first left stop), and the symbol variation stop control means Based on the fact that the combination of specific symbols (for example, the combination of any of "special rips A1 to 6" or "special rip B") is stopped in the symbol display means, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state (for example, For example, the transition from the "normal game state") to the first game state (for example, "main CZ state 1") is performed, and in the first game state, during a specific number of games (for example, during eight games), When a specific transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (for example, "AT in progress"), and when the specific transition condition is not satisfied, the gaming state is shifted. , A game state transition control means (for example, a state management process by the main CPU 51) that shifts the game state from the first game state to the normal game state, and a symbol displayed on the symbol display means in the first game state. A main effect means (for example, a reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) that performs an effect according to a variation mode (for example, an effect by reel actions 1 to 8), and a symbol variation mode that is performed by the main effect means in the first game state. Disables the game operation by the player according to the production by A specific lock execution means for executing a specific lock (for example, a game start lock execution process by the main CPU 51) and the internal winning combination determining means determine the specific internal winning combination, and the stop operation is predetermined. (For example, the push order for the additional lock) is performed, and the game is based on the fact that the symbol variation stop control means stops the combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "middle stage replay") on the symbol display means. A main control means including a predetermined lock execution means (for example, a lock execution process at the end of a game by the main CPU 51) for executing a predetermined lock (for example, a lock based on lock data after all stops) for invalidating a game operation by a player. (For example, the main CPU 51) and the secondary game state transition control means, when the game state is controlled to the second game state, the notification means notifies the information of an advantageous stop operation regarding the addition of the game medium. A sub-control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) including an effect means (for example, a process at the time of receiving a start command by the sub CPU 81) is provided, and the specific transition condition is such that the main effect means produces an effect according to a specific symbol variation mode. It is to be performed (for example, the reel actions 5 to 8 are executed), and when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock executing means, the benefit of shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state. Is further provided with specific profit giving means (for example, sub CPU 81, main CPU 51) that gives a player a different specific profit (for example, determination of an AT count addition value, transition to a pseudo-probability change state). Game machine.

Further, in the second game state, when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock executing means, the specific profit giving means receives information on the stop operation by the sub-effect means as the specific profit. A gaming machine characterized in that a profit for increasing the number of times of notification (for example, determination of an AT number addition value by control of a sub CPU 81) is given.

In addition, when the predetermined lock is executed by the predetermined lock executing means in the second gaming state, the specific profit giving means sets the gaming state from the second gaming state to the third as the specific profit. A gaming machine characterized in that a profit of shifting to a gaming state (for example, shifting to a production gaming state "pseudo-probability changing state" controlled by the main CPU 51) is given.

According to this game machine, in a chance zone state (for example, "main CZ state 1") in which lock is easily executed, depending on the type of effect (for example, reel action) according to the symbol variation mode executed at the time of lock execution. By shifting to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT gaming), the sense of expectation can be significantly improved.

In addition, according to this gaming machine, when the transition to the chance zone state is not appropriate (for example, during AT game or during AT preparation), a specific internal winning combination (for example, during AT preparation) that triggers the transition to the chance zone state is performed. If you win a "strong chance lip"), you will not be transferred to the chance zone state to prevent the game content from becoming difficult to understand, and by giving different profits, you will win a specific internal winning role. You can enjoy the profits you have made.

A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and a reel normal control means (for example, a main CPU 51) that normally controls the plurality of reels in order to advance the game. (Reel control processing), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a reel effect determining means (for example, a lock lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining the type of effect according to the symbol variation mode of the plurality of reels, and the symbols of the plurality of reels. A game machine including a reel effect control means (for example, a reel effect control process by the main CPU 51) for controlling an effect (for example, a reel action) according to a variation mode, and the reel effect control means determines the reel effect. Reel effect selection data determining means (for example, of the main CPU 51) that determines reel effect selection data associated with excitation output selection data for each of the plurality of reels according to the type of effect determined by the means. The excitation output table in which the rotation direction and the amount of rotation of the reel are determined based on the processing of S276 in the reel effect control process by control) and the reel effect selection data determined by the reel effect selection data determining means. Excitation output selection data determining means for determining the type, or at least the type of symbol position adjustment data indicating that the effect symbol position, which is the symbol position for starting the effect on the reel, should be adjusted as the excitation output selection data (for example, , S277 in the reel effect control process controlled by the main CPU 51) and the excitation output selection data determining means, when the symbol position adjustment data is determined as the excitation output selection data, the effect symbol The effect symbol position adjusting means including the effect symbol position adjusting means for adjusting the position (for example, reel effect adjustment output processing by the main CPU 51), the effect symbol position adjusting means corresponds to the type of the symbol position adjustment data and the effect symbol position. By selecting the excitation output table (for example, executing the processing of S294, the processing of S297, the processing of S300, and the processing of S308 in the reel effect adjustment output processing controlled by the main CPU 51), the effect symbol position A game machine characterized by making adjustments.

According to this game machine, when the excitation output table is determined as the selection data for the excitation output, the excitation output is controlled using the excitation output table, and the symbol position adjustment data is determined as the selection data for the excitation output. If this is the case, an excitation output table is selected according to the type of symbol position adjustment data and the position of the effect symbol, and the excitation output control is performed using the selected excitation output table. Since the reel symbol position can be adjusted only when it is desired to perform the effect according to the reel symbol variation mode in the state where the symbols (for example, "Red 7" symbol) are aligned, the effect according to the reel symbol variation mode is started. Even if a deviation occurs in the reel symbol position during the production by the front or the reel symbol variation mode, the deviation is adjusted without increasing the control load, and it depends on the intended reel symbol variation mode. The production can be enjoyed by the player.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 51) for determining an internal winning combination. (Internal lottery process), a symbol variation start control means (for example, reel rotation start process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) that starts the symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the symbol fluctuation stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. And, based on the profit-giving means (for example, the medal payout process by the main CPU 51) that grants the profit according to the combination of the stopped symbols and the predetermined start condition, until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. An advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) that controls an advantageous game state (for example, AT game) that is advantageous to the player, and a first indicating that the advantageous game state is controlled by the advantageous game state control means. A second external signal (for example, external signal 1) that controls the start and end of the output of the external signal (for example, the external signal 2) and indicates that the advantageous gaming state is continued by the advantageous gaming state control means. The external signal output control means (for example, external signal output management processing by the main CPU 51) for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal output control means is provided, and the predetermined output start condition is satisfied (for example). In a unit game different from the unit game in which the output of the first external signal is started and the output of the first external signal is started based on the fact that the winning count counter during the normal game is 3). When the output of the second external signal is started based on the fact that only the first external signal is output, and the first external signal and the second external signal are output, the output of the second external signal is started. Based on the fact that a specific output end condition is satisfied (for example, the winning count counter during the AT game has reached a predetermined value), only the output of the second external signal is terminated, and the first external signal and the first external signal and When the second external signal is output, the first external signal and the second external signal are based on the fact that a predetermined output end condition is satisfied (for example, the AT end counter becomes 2). A game machine characterized by ending the output of an external signal of.

According to this gaming machine, the first external signal (for example, external signal 2) indicating that the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) has been controlled and the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) have continued. Since a second external signal (for example, external signal 1) indicating the above is output, the number of initial hits and the number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state, which is of great interest to the player, are appropriately displayed by an external display or the like. be able to.

Further, according to this gaming machine, a first external signal (for example, an external signal 2) indicating that the control has been controlled to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) and an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) continue. Since the second external signal (for example, the external signal 1) indicating that the signal has been output is output at different timings due to the simple configuration, the control load on the external display side can be reduced, and a communication error or the like can be reduced. Can also be reduced.

Further, the predetermined output start condition is a condition in which the establishment of the predetermined output start condition arrives later than the predetermined start condition (for example, the start of the AT game controlled by the sub CPU 81), and the specific output end condition is the predetermined. A gaming machine characterized in that its establishment is later than the termination condition of (for example, the termination of an AT game controlled by the sub CPU 81).

According to this gaming machine, the start and end of an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT game) are determined by a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 or the like) controlled by a sub-control circuit rather than a display by an external display or the like. Since the player can be notified as soon as possible by the notification, the convenience of the player playing the game can be improved.

Further, a difference number management means for managing the difference number in the advantageous gaming state (for example, a difference number counter for AT management) and a winning number management means for managing the number of winnings of the specific small winning combination in the advantageous gaming state (for example, AT). The difference number counter for management) is further provided, and the predetermined end condition is that the difference number managed by the difference number management means is a predetermined number (for example, 0 or less), and the specific output. The ending condition is that the number of winnings managed by the winning number management means has reached a predetermined number (for example, 38 times).

According to this game machine, in particular, the number of times the AT game is continued (1 set) can be appropriately displayed with a simple configuration.

Based on symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a player's start operation (for example, operation on the start lever 16). The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) for determining the internal winning combination, and the symbol variation start control for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the start operation. The symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and the player's stop operation (for example, operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R). When the symbol variation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 51) and the symbol variation stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. A profit-giving means (for example, a medal payout process by the main CPU 51) for giving a profit according to a combination of stopped symbols is provided, and the internal winning combination is such that the stop operation is performed in the first stop operation order (for example,). , "Middle left and right"), the first combination of symbols (for example, 7 cards with correct push order and rising to the right) will be displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the first internal winning combination (for example). , Middle left and right bell A) and when the stop operation is performed in the second stop operation order (for example, "right, left, middle"), a combination of the second symbols (for example, 7 sheets in the middle of the correct push order). A second internal winning combination (for example, right / left middle bell B) to be displayed on the symbol display means, and a third stop operation when the stop operation is performed in the first stop operation order. The combination of symbols (for example, the lower 7 sheets in the correct push order) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the third internal winning combination (for example, middle left and right bell C) and the stop operation are the second. The internal winning combination includes a fourth internal winning combination (for example, right / left middle bell C) in which the third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means when the stop operation order is performed. The combination determining means determines the first internal winning combination and the second internal winning combination as the internal winning combination with the first probability (for example, the coefficient "750"), and sets the third internal winning combination as the internal winning combination. The fourth internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination with a second probability (for example, a coefficient "250") lower than the first probability, and the profit-giving means is a combination of the first symbols. , The combination of the second symbol and the combination of the third symbol A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined profit (for example, payout of seven medals), which is the same profit, is given when displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, the first internal winning combination is set to the timing of the stop operation when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation order different from the first stop operation order (for example, "right, left, middle"). Correspondingly, any one of a plurality of combinations of the fourth symbols (for example, one correct pressing position) is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the second internal winning combination is. When the stop operation is performed in a stop operation order different from the second stop operation order (for example, "middle left and right"), a plurality of the fourth symbols are used according to the timing of the stop operation. Any one of the combinations (for example, one correct answer at the pressing position) is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the symbol display means, and in the third internal winning combination, the stop operation is the first When the stop operation order is different from the stop operation order of, any one of the plurality of combinations of the fourth symbols (for example, one unquestioned symbol) is displayed regardless of the timing of the stop operation. It is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the means, and the fourth internal winning combination is the stop operation when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation order different from the second stop operation order. Regardless of the timing of the operation, any one of the plurality of combinations of the fourth symbols (for example, one unquestioned symbol) is an internal winning combination to be displayed on the symbol display means, and the profit-giving means is , A game machine characterized in that when a combination of the fourth symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, a specific profit (for example, payout of one medal) less than the predetermined profit is given. ..

According to this game machine, even when a plurality of small winning combinations are specified, it is possible to prevent the outcome (combination of displayed symbols) from becoming monotonous when the stop operation order is correct. ..

Further, according to this game machine, even when a plurality of small winning combinations are specified, the amount of data is reduced and the control burden of the internal lottery processing is reduced by reducing the number of internal winning combinations. be able to.

Further, according to this game machine, even when a plurality of small winning combinations are specified, by reducing the number of internal winning combinations, it becomes easy to evenly allocate the desired lottery value, so that the lottery is fair. It also contributes to sexuality and ease of design.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a start operation detection means (for example, a start switch) that detects a start operation by a player. 16S), a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 17S) that detects a stop operation by a player, and an internal that determines an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The symbol variation that starts the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the fact that the start operation is detected by the winning combination determining means (for example, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and the start operation detecting means. A predetermined maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, a symbol) based on the start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation being detected by the stop operation detection means. Within the range of (4 pieces), a predetermined condition is satisfied with the symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Based on what has been done (for example, either cherry rip or strong cherry rip has been determined as the internal winning combination), the effect according to the symbol variation mode displayed on the symbol display means (for example, special reel action). (For example, the main CPU 51) and the lock starting means (for example, the main) for starting the lock that invalidates the game operation by the player when the effect according to the symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect means. A lock period determining means (for example,) that determines a lock period for which the lock continues based on the CPU 51) and the lock starting means starting the lock and detecting the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. The lock termination means (for example, the main CPU 51) that terminates the lock based on the lapse of the lock execution process at the start of the game shown by the main CPU 51 and the lock period determined by the lock period determining means. In the symbol variation stop control means, when the lock period is determined by the lock period determining means, the stop operation detection means detects the stop operation, and the lock end means terminates the lock. The lock is terminated by the lock termination means (for example, the step of FIG. 78) even when the lock is continued until Assuming that the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means based on the fact that the special control flag is on and the effect timer is 0 in S574 (for example, step S576 in FIG. 78). A game machine characterized in that the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped (based on the request for output of the special on-edge signal).

Further, the lock period determining means locks the lock based on the position of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the pseudo stop start position) when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A game machine characterized by determining a period.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a start operation detection means (for example, a start switch) that detects a start operation by a player. 16S), a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 17S) that detects a stop operation by a player, and an internal that determines an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The symbol variation that starts the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the fact that the start operation is detected by the winning combination determining means (for example, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 51) and the start operation detecting means. A predetermined maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, a symbol) based on the start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 51) and the stop operation being detected by the stop operation detection means. Within the range of (4 pieces), the symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 51) for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the internal winning combination determination. The symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means is based on the fact that a specific internal winning combination is determined by the means (for example, either a cherry lip or a strong cherry lip is determined as the internal winning combination). A main effect means (for example, the main CPU 51) that performs an effect according to an aspect (for example, a special reel action) and a lock that invalidates the game operation by the player when the effect according to the symbol variation mode is performed by the main effect means. Based on the lock start means (for example, the main CPU 51) and the lock start means that start the lock and the stop operation detection means detects the stop operation, the specific internal winning combination is used. The position of the symbol (for example, the symbol positions of the symbol position data 12 and 17) and the stop operation detecting means in which a specific symbol (for example, a "cherry" symbol) constituting the combination of the symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. A lock period determining means (for example, a lock period determining means for determining a lock period in which the lock continues, according to the position of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, a pseudo stop start position) when the stop operation is detected. For example, the lock execution process at the start of the game shown in FIG. 77 by the main CPU 51) and the lock period determined by the lock period determining means have elapsed. The symbol variation stop control means includes a lock end means (for example, the main CPU 51) for terminating the lock period, and the stop operation by the stop operation detection means when the lock period is determined by the lock period determination means. Even when the detection of is continued until the lock is terminated by the lock termination means, the lock is terminated by the lock termination means (for example, in step S574 of FIG. 78, the special control flag is set. Assuming that the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means based on the fact that it is on and the effect timer is determined to be 0 (for example, in step S576 of FIG. 78, the output of the special on-edge signal is output. A gaming machine characterized in that the particular symbol stops the fluctuation of the symbol at the position of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (based on the request).

According to this game machine, it is possible to give the player the impression that the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed by using the effect of the symbol variation mode (for example, a special reel action), so that the maximum number of sliding pieces can be increased. Even if it is set to 4 pieces, it is possible to significantly improve the interest in the stop operation.

Further, according to this game machine, a combination of symbols related to a specific internal winning combination (for example, cherry lip or strong cherry lip) (for example, a combination of symbols related to cherry lip A "cherry-ANY-ANY") is used. Since the constituent symbols (for example, the "cherry" symbol on the reel 3L) can be easily stopped, the player can easily detect that a specific internal winning combination has been established, and the game It will be possible to dramatically improve the interest of.

Further, a stop operation continuation suggestion effect for notifying that the stop operation should be continued based on the effect according to the symbol variation mode performed by the main effect means (for example, the stop operation continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 79). It is characterized in that it further includes an effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) for executing the above.

According to this game machine, it is possible to surely enjoy the effect (for example, special reel action) by the symbol variation mode that can give the player the impression that the maximum number of sliding pieces has been changed.

Although the present embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited thereto. That is, the specific configuration of each means and the like provided in the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the example adopted in the above-described embodiment of the present invention, and can be arbitrarily modified as long as the gist of the present invention is not deviated. Is.

For example, in the present embodiment, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are adopted as the symbol display means, but a configuration in which a liquid crystal display device is used in place of or in combination with this. May be. That is, the image of the design displayed on the liquid crystal display device may be variablely displayed. Further, the display window may be a single display window 4, and a part of the symbols arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be displayed by the display window 4.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the internal winning combination determining means, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value generated by the random number generator 56 and performs the internal lottery processing. Alternatively, at the same time, a random number value may be acquired using a random number generation circuit (not shown) built in the main CPU 51.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation of the player, the start switch 16S for detecting the operation to the start lever 16 is adopted, and the stop for detecting the stop operation of the player is stopped. As the operation detecting means, the stop switch 17S for detecting the operation to the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is adopted, but a touch panel switch may be used instead of or in combination with this.

Further, for example, the various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 51 or the sub CPU 81 shown in the present embodiment are appropriately modified in their management modes without departing from the spirit of the present invention. be able to. For example, various counters and various timers managed by "addition" may be managed by "subtraction", and in this case, the judgment as to whether or not it is "~ or more" is "~ or less". The judgment as to whether or not it is "more than" shall be read as the judgment as to whether or not it is "less than". Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by "subtraction" may be managed by "addition", and in this case, the determination of whether or not it is "~ or less" is "~". It shall be read as a judgment as to whether or not it is "more than", and a judgment as to whether or not it is "less than" shall be read as a judgment as to whether or not it is "more than".

Further, for example, the various counters managed by the control of the main CPU 51 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 81 without departing from the spirit of the present invention. The various counters managed by the control of the main CPU 51 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 51 within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention.

Further, for example, the various gaming states managed by the control of the main CPU 51 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 81 within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. The states of various games managed by the control of the CPU 81 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 51 within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

It should be noted that all the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments may be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. it can.

1 Pachislot machine 3L, 3C, 3R reel 4L, 4C, 4R Display window 16 Start lever 16S Start switch 17L, 17C, 17R Stop button 17S Stop switch 41 Main control circuit 42 Sub control circuit 51 Main CPU
53 Main RAM
81 sub CPU
83 sub RAM

Claims (2)

Based on the fact that the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous game state control means that controls the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and
Notification means for executing notification of various information to the player,
A gaming machine including a notification control means for controlling notification executed by the notification means.
The advantageous gaming state control means, at least, that the number of contact Keru game in different normal gaming state advantageous gaming state becomes game number of Jo Tokoro and the predetermined start condition,
The notification control means determines one specific notification data from a plurality of specific notification data according to the number of games until the predetermined number of games is reached in the normal game state, and responds to the determined specific notification data. The notification is executed by the notification means.
The plurality of specific notification data includes at least the first specific notification data and the second specific notification data.
And when the game number until the predetermined number of game is the first range, when a second range, it is possible to determine the first specific notification data with a predetermined probability, the particular The second specific notification data can be determined with a probability,
And when the game number until the predetermined number of game is the third range, when a fourth range, it is possible to determine the second specific broadcast data at the predetermined probability, the The first specific notification data can be determined with a specific probability.
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of games until the predetermined number of games is reached in the order of the third range, the first range, the fourth range, and the second range is small . The plurality of specific notification data further includes a third specific notification data.
When the number of games until the number of games reaches the predetermined number is within the first range, the third specific notification data can be determined with the predetermined probability.
And when the game number until the predetermined number of game is the second range, and when said a third range, when the a fourth range, the in the specified probability third The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific notification data of the above can be determined.

Images